Alcatel-Lucent OV3600 Version 6.3 wireless network management Configuration Guide

Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration Guide
www.alcatel-lucent.com/enterprise
Part Number: 0510614-01
Configuration Guide
OV3600 Version 6.3
Copyright
© 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent, and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. While every effort has been made to ensure technical accuracy,
information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Alcatel-Lucent.
2 | Copyright
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Contents
Preface7
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Document Audience and Organization
7
Related Documents
7
Text Conventions
7
Contacting Alcatel-Lucent
8
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
9
Introduction
9
Requirements and Restrictions for Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
10
Components of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Global Configuration and Scope
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups
AP Overrides
WLANs
Profiles
Security
Advanced Services
Folders, Users, and Visibility
Additional Concepts and Benefits
Scheduling Configuration Changes
Auditing and Reviewing Configurations
Licensing and Dependencies in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
10
10
11
11
12
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
Navigating Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
The Primary Pages of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Page Overview
Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config Page Overview
APs/Devices > List Page Overview
APs/Devices > Manage Page Overview
APs/Devices > Monitor Page Overview
Groups > Basic Page Overview
Embedded Profile Setup in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Save, Save and Apply, and Revert Buttons
15
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
Setting Up Initial Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Prerequisites
Procedure
What Next?
Additional Capabilities of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
18
18
18
23
23
Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations
25
Introduction
25
General Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Procedures and Guidelines
26
Guidelines and Pages for Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
26
Selecting Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch Groups
26
Configuring Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups
26
What Next?
28
Retaining Unreferenced Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Profiles
28
General WLAN Procedures and Guidelines
Guidelines and Pages for WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Configuring or Editing WLANs with Basic View
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
28
28
28
Contents | 3
Configuring or Editing WLANs with Advanced View
General Profiles Guidelines
30
31
General WLAN Switch Procedures and Guidelines
31
Using Master, Standby Master, and Local WLAN Switches in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
31
Pushing Device Configurations to WLAN switches
31
Appendix A
4 | Contents
Supporting APs with Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
AP Overrides Guidelines
Configuring or Editing AP Overrides
Changing Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) Settings
Changing SSID and Encryption Settings
Changing the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group for an AP Device
32
32
32
34
34
34
Visibility in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Visibility Overview
Defining Visibility for Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
35
35
35
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
39
Introduction
39
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Pages and Field Descriptions
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups
41
41
WLAN Pages and Field Descriptions
Overview of WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
WLANs
WLANs > Basic
WLANs > Advanced
45
45
45
46
47
AP Overrides Pages and Field Descriptions
AP Overrides
50
50
Profiles Pages and Field Descriptions
Understanding Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Profiles
Profiles > AAA
Profiles > AAA
Profiles > AAA > Captive Portal Auth
Modifying the Initial User Role
Profiles > AAA > Mac Auth
Profiles > AAA > Stateful 802.1X Auth
Profiles > AAA > Wired Auth Profile
Profiles > AAA > VPN Auth
Profiles > AAA > Management Auth
Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth
Profiles > AP
Profiles > AP > System
Profiles > AP > Regulatory Domain
Profiles > AP > AP Wired
Profiles > AP > AP Ethernet Link
Profiles > AP > SNMP
Profiles > AP > SNMP > SNMP User
Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch Traps
Access Point/Air Monitor Traps
Profiles > IDS
Profiles > IDS > General
Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching
Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching > Signatures
Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service
Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service > Rate Threshold
Profiles > IDS > Impersonation
Profiles > IDS > Unauthorized Device
55
55
56
57
58
60
60
61
62
62
63
64
69
70
73
75
76
77
77
78
79
81
83
84
85
85
88
90
91
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > Mesh
Profiles > Mesh > Radio
Profiles > Mesh > Cluster
Profiles > QoS
Profiles > QoS > Traffic Management
Profiles > QoS > VoIP Call Admission Control
Profiles > RF
Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio
Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio > ARM
Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio > High-Throughput (HT) Radio
Profiles > RF > Event Thresholds
Profiles > RF > Optimization Profiles
Profiles > SSID
Profiles > EDCA AP
Profiles > SSID > EDCA AP
Profiles > SSID > EDCA Station
Profiles > SSID > HT SSID
Security Pages and Field Descriptions
Security > User Roles
Security > User Roles > BW Contracts
Security > User Roles > VPN Dialers
Security > Policies
Security > Policies > Destinations
Security > Policies > Services
Security > Server Groups
Server Groups Page Overview
Supported Servers
Adding a New Server Group
Security > Server Groups > LDAP
Security > Server Groups > RADIUS
Security > Server Groups > TACACS
Security > Server Groups > Internal
Security > Server Groups > XML API
Security > Server Groups > RFC 3576
Security > TACACS Accounting
Security > Time Ranges
Security > User Rules
94
94
96
97
97
98
101
101
103
106
107
109
111
111
115
118
121
123
124
126
127
130
130
131
132
132
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
139
140
141
Advanced Services Pages and Field Descriptions
143
Overview of IP Mobility Domains
143
Advanced Services > IP Mobility
144
Advanced Services > IP Mobility > Mobility Domain
147
Advanced Services > VPN Services
148
Advanced Services > VPN Services > IKE
149
Advanced Services > VPN Services > L2TP
150
Advanced Services > VPN Services > PPTP
151
Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC
152
Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map
153
Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map > Transform Set
154
Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config Page and Section Information
155
Index157
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Contents | 5
6 | Contents
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Preface
Document Audience and Organization
This user guide is intended for wireless network administrators and helpdesk personnel who deploy AOS-W on the network
and wish to manage it with the OmniVista 3600 Air Manager (OV3600), Version 6.3 or later. This document provides
instructions for using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration and contains the following chapters:
Table 1 Document Organization and Purposes
Chapter
Description
Chapter 1, “Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration”
Introduces the concepts, components, navigation, and initial setup of
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration.
Chapter 2, “Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily
Operations”
Provides a series of procedures for configuring, modifying, and using
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration once initial setup is complete. This
chapter is oriented around the most common tasks in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration.
Appendix A, “Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference”
Provides an encyclopedic reference to the fields, settings, and default
values of all Alcatel-Lucent Configuration components, to include a
few additional procedures supporting more advanced configurations.
Related Documents
The following documentation supports the OmniVista 3600 Air Manager (OV3600), Version 6.3, and is viewable from the
Home > Documentation page in OV3600:




Quickstart Guide
User Guide
Supported APs/Devices
Supported Firmware Versions
Text Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual to emphasize important concepts:
Table 2 Text Conventions
Type Style
Description
Italics
This style is used to emphasize important terms and to mark the titles of books.
System items
This fixed-width font depicts the following:
Sample screen output
 System prompts
 Filenames, software devices, and specific commands when mentioned in the text

Commands
In the command examples, this bold font depicts text that you must type exactly as shown.
<Arguments>
In the command examples, italicized text within angle brackets represents items that you should replace
with information appropriate to your specific situation. For example:
# send <text message>
In this example, you would type “send” at the system prompt exactly as shown, followed by the text of
the message you wish to send. Do not type the angle brackets.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Preface | 7
Table 2 Text Conventions
Type Style
Description
[Optional]
In the command examples, items enclosed in brackets are optional. Do not type the brackets.
{Item A | Item B}
In the command examples, items within curled braces and separated by a vertical bar represent the
available choices. Enter only one choice. Do not type the braces or bars.
This document uses the following notice icons to emphasize advisories for certain actions, configurations, or concepts:
Indicates helpful suggestions, pertinent information, and important things to remember.
NOTE
!
Indicates a risk of damage to your hardware or loss of data.
CAUTION
Indicates a risk of personal injury or death.
WARNING
Contacting Alcatel-Lucent
Online Contact and Support
Main Website
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/enterprise
Support Website
https://service.esd.alcatel-lucent.com
Alcatel-Lucent Enterprise Service and OmniVista
3600 Email Support
[email protected]
8 | Preface
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | Version 6.2
Chapter 1
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration
Introduction
AOS-W is the operating system, software suite, and application engine that operates OmniAccess WLAN
switches and centralizes control over the entire mobile environment. The AOS-W Wizards, the AOS-W
command-line interface (CLI), and the AOS-W WebUI are the primary means by which to configure and
deploy AOS-W. For a complete description of AOS-W, refer to the AOS-W User Guide for release 3.3.2.10.
Commencing with the OmniVista 3600 Air Manager (OV3600) Version 6.3, the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
feature consolidates AOS-W configuration and pushes global Alcatel-Lucent Configurations from one utility.
This chapter introduces the components and initial setup of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration with the
following topics:
Requirements and Restrictions for Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Components of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration

Global Configuration and Scope

Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups

Profiles

WLANs

Security

Advanced Services

Folders, Users, and Visibility

Scheduling Configuration Changes
Navigating Alcatel-Lucent Configuration

The Primary Pages of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration

Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Page Overview

Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config Page Overview

APs/Devices > List Page Overview

Groups > Basic Page Overview

Embedded Profile Setup in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration

Save, Save and Apply, and Revert Buttons
Setting Up Initial Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
NOTE
OV3600 6.3 supports device Groups as in prior OV3600 versions. However, OV3600 6.3 introduces Alcatel-Lucent
AP Groups, and these are distinct and must not be confused with standard OV3600 Device Groups. This
document provides information about the configuration and use of Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups, and describes how
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups interoperate with standard OV3600 Device Groups.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration | 9
Requirements and Restrictions for Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration has the following requirements in OV3600 Version 6.3:

OV3600 6.3 or a later OV3600 version must be installed and operational on the network.

OmniAccess WLAN switches on the network must have AOS-W installed and operational. OV3600
Version 6.3 supports AOS-W release 3.3.2.10 or later 3.3.x releases.

Ensure you have Telnet/SSH credentials (configuration only) and the “enable” password (configuration
only). Without proper Telnet/SSH credentials a user is not able to fetch the running configuration, nor
acquire license and serial information from WLAN switches.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration has the following restrictions in OV3600 Version 6.3:

Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in OV3600 Version 6.3 does not support certain AOS-W Network
components, such as the Management components, the WLAN switch IP address, VLANs, or interfaces.
Support for these components will be available with later OV3600 versions. OV3600 Version 6.3 supports
only IP Mobility and VLANs in Advanced Services.

Future versions of OV3600 will support Alcatel-Lucent AP Group and Profile distribution from the
Master Console.
Components of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration emphasizes the following components and network management concepts:

Global Configuration and Scope

Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups

AP Overrides

WLANs

Profiles

Security

Advanced Services

Folders, Users, and Visibility

Additional Concepts and Benefits
Global Configuration and Scope
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration supports AOS-W as follows:


OV3600 supports global configuration from both a master-local WLAN switch deployment and an allmaster WLAN switch deployment as follows:

In a master-local WLAN switch deployment, AOS-W is the agent that pushes global configurations
from master WLAN switches to local WLAN switch. OV3600 supports this AOS-W functionality.

In an all-master-WLAN switch scenario, every master WLAN switch operates independent of other
master WLAN switch. OV3600 provides the ability to push configuration to all master WLAN switch
in this scenario.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration supports all AOS-W profiles, Alcatel-Lucent AP Profiles, Servers, and User
Roles.
10 | Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
For additional information about these and additional functions, refer to “General WLAN Switch
Procedures and Guidelines” on page 31.
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups
An Alcatel-Lucent AP Group is a collection of configuration profiles that define specific settings on
OmniAccess WLAN switches and the devices that they govern. An Alcatel-Lucent AP Group references
multiple configuration profiles, and in turn links to multiple WLANs.
Navigate to the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups page. Figure 1
illustrates one example of this page.
Figure 1 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Navigation
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups are not to be confused with conventional OV3600 device groups. OV3600 6.3
supports both group types and both are viewable on the Groups > List page when so configured.
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups have the following characteristics:

Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups are global, and any Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch can support multiple AlcatelLucent AP Groups.

Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups are assigned to folders, and folders define visibility. Using conventional
OV3600 folders to define visibility, Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups can provide visibility to some or many
components while blocking visibility to other users for more sensitive components, such as SSIDs.
Navigate to the Users pages to define folder visibility, and refer to “Visibility in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration” on page 35.

You can import a WLAN switch configuration file from AOS-W for Alcatel-Lucent AP Group deployment
in OV3600.
For additional information, refer to the following sections in this document:

“Setting Up Initial Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 18

“General Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Procedures and Guidelines” on page 26
AP Overrides
The second major component of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration is the AP Overrides page, appearing
immediately below Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups in the Navigation Pane. Figure 2 illustrates this location and
access:
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration | 11
Figure 2 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Overrides Navigation
AP Overrides operate as follows in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration:

First, OmniAccess WLAN switches and AP devices operate in Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups that define
shared parameters for all devices in those groups. The Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration >
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups page displays all current Alcatel-Lucent AP groups.

AP Override allows you to change some parameters for any specific device without having to create an
Alcatel-Lucent AP group per AP.

The name of any AP Override should be the same as the name of the device to which it applies.
This establishes the basis of all linking to that device. Custom-created AP Overrides appear in the
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane, as illustrated in Figure 2.

Once you have created an AP Override for a device in a group, you specify the WLANs to be included and
excluded.

For additional information about how to configure and use AP Overrides, refer to these topics:

“AP Overrides Guidelines” on page 32

“Configuring or Editing AP Overrides” on page 32

“AP Overrides Pages and Field Descriptions” on page 50
WLANs
Access WLANs with Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs, illustrated in Figure 3.
Figure 3 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs Navigation
The following concepts govern the use of WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration:

WLANs are the same as virtual AP configuration profiles.

WLAN profiles contain several diverse settings to include SSIDs, referenced Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups,
Traffic Management profiles, and device Folders.
This document describes WLAN configuration in the following section and chapter:

“Setting Up Initial Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 18

“General WLAN Procedures and Guidelines” on page 28

“WLAN Pages and Field Descriptions” on page 45
12 | Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles
Figure 4 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles Navigation
Profiles provide a way to organize and deploy groups of configurations for Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups,
WLANs, and other profiles. Profiles are assigned to folders; this establishes visibility to Alcatel-Lucent AP
Groups and WLAN settings. Access Profiles with Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles,
illustrated in Figure 4.
Profiles are organized by type in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration. Custom-named profiles do not appear in the
navigation pane as do custom-named Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups, WLANs, and AP Overrides.
For additional information about profile procedures and guidelines, refer to the following sections in this
document:

“Setting Up Initial Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 18

“General Profiles Guidelines” on page 31

“Profiles Pages and Field Descriptions” on page 55
Security
Figure 5 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security Navigation
The Security section displays, adds, edits, or deletes security profiles in multiple categories, to include user
roles, policies, rules, and servers such as RADIUS, TACACS+, and LDAP servers.
Navigate to Security with the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security path. The following
general guidelines apply to Security profiles in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration:

Roles can have multiple policies; each policy can have numerous roles.

Server groups are comprised of servers and rules. Security rules apply in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in
the same way as deployed in AOS-W.
For additional information about Security, refer to “Security Pages and Field Descriptions” on page 123.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration | 13
Advanced Services
Figure 6 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services Navigation
Navigate to Advanced Services with the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services
path.The Advanced Services section in OV3600 6.3 includes IP Mobility and VPN Services. Figure 6
illustrates this page.
For additional information about IP Mobility and VPN Services, refer to “Advanced Services Pages and Field
Descriptions” on page 143.
Folders, Users, and Visibility
Access and edit folders and visibility using the Folder column on the Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config page.
Profiles and Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups are assigned to folders. Folders allow you to set the visibility for
WLAN switch information, and to set read/write privileges as required.

As one example, it may be necessary to provide OV3600 users with RF radio parameters while restricting
access to SSID profiles.
Additional Concepts and Benefits
Scheduling Configuration Changes
You can schedule deployment of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration to minimize impact on network
performance. For example, configuration changes can be accumulated over time by using Save and Apply
for devices in Monitor mode, then pushing all configuration changes at one time by putting devices in
Manage mode. Refer to “Pushing Device Configurations to WLAN switches” on page 31.
OV3600 pushes configuration settings that are defined in the GUI to the OmniAccess WLAN switches as a
set of CLI commands using Secure Shell (SSH). No WLAN switch reboot is required.
Auditing and Reviewing Configurations
OV3600 supports auditing or reviewing in these ways.
1. You can review the AOS-W running configuration file. This is configuration information that OV3600
reads from the device. In template-based configuration, you can review the running configuration file
when working on a related template.
2. You can use the APs/Devices > Audit page for device-specific auditing.
3. Once you audit your WLAN switch, you can click Import from the APs/Devices > Audit page to reverse all
of the profiles on the WLAN switch.
Licensing and Dependencies in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
You can review your current licensing status with the Licensing link on the APs/Devices > Monitor page.
OV3600 requires that you have PEF always installed on all OmniAccess WLAN switches. If you push a policy
to a WLAN switch without PEF, a Good configuration will not result, and the WLAN switch will show as
Mismatched on OV3600 pages that reflect device configuration status.
14 | Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration includes several settings or functions that are dependent on special licenses.
The user interface conveys that a special license is required for any such setting, function, or profile.
OV3600 does not push such configurations when a license related to those configurations is unavailable.
The following licenses are required for additional functions, profiles, or settings in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration:

External Services Interface (ESI)

Indoor Mesh Access Points

Ortronics Access Points

Outdoor Mesh Access Points

Policy Enforcement Firewall

Remote Access Points

Voice Service Module

VPN Server Module

Wireless Intrusion Protection Module

xSec Module
Navigating Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
The Primary Pages of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration emphasizes the following pages in OV3600 Version 6.3 and later versions, as
follows:

Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Page Overview—deploys and maintains Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration.

Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config Page Overview—manages Alcatel-Lucent AP group and other WLAN
switch-wide setting defined on the Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config page.

APs/Devices > List Page Overview—modifies or reboots devices to be used in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration.

APs/Devices > Manage Page Overview—supports device-level settings and changes.

APs/Devices > Monitor Page Overview—supports device-level monitoring.

Groups > Basic Page Overview—enables Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in the OV3600 GUI and displays
preferences for Alcatel-Lucent and other devices.
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Page Overview
This page uses an expandable navigation pane to support Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups, AP Overrides, WLANs,
Profiles, Security, and Advanced Services. Additional information is available in this document as follows:

Figure 7 illustrates this page.

The section “Components of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 10 describes all components.

Appendix A, “Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference” on page 39 describes all settings for all pages.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration | 15
Figure 7 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Navigation Pane (Contracted and Expanded)
Only Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups, AP Overrides, and WLANs contain custom-created items in the navigation pane.
NOTE
The navigation pane can be used as follows:

Any portion with a plus sign (+) expands with a click to display additional contents.

Any portion of the navigation tree can be contracted by clicking the contract sign (-).

You can display the Edit or Details page for any component with a single click.
Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config Page Overview
This focused submenu page displays and edits all configured Alcatel-Lucent AP groups, with the following
factors:

Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups must be defined from the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page before they are
visible on the Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config page.

Use this page to select the Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups that you push to WLAN switches.

Use this page to associate a standard device group to one or more Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups.

From this page, you can select other profiles that are defined on the WLAN switch, like an internal
server.
APs/Devices > List Page Overview
This page supports devices in all of OV3600, to include OmniAccess WLAN switches governed by AlcatelLucent Configuration in support of per-AP settings. Select Modify Devices to configure thin AP settings. This
page supports WLAN switch reboot, WLAN switch re-provisioning, and changing Alcatel-Lucent AP groups.
APs/Devices > Manage Page Overview
This page configures device-level settings, including Manage mode that enables pushing configurations to
WLAN switches. For additional information, refer to “Pushing Device Configurations to WLAN switches” on
page 31.
16 | Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
APs/Devices > Monitor Page Overview
Used in conjunction with the Manage page, the Monitor page enables review of device-level settings. For
additional information, refer to “Pushing Device Configurations to WLAN switches” on page 31.
Groups > Basic Page Overview
The Groups > Basic page deploys the following aspects of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration:

This page contains a new Alcatel-Lucent GUI Config field. Use this page and field to make the Device
Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Config page visible. This page is enabled by default in OV3600 6.3.

Use this page to control which device settings appear on the Groups pages.

If you are using Alcatel-Lucent firmware prior to version 3.0, you should disable Alcatel-Lucent GUI
configuration from the Groups > Basic page and use template-based configuration.
Embedded Profile Setup in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
OV3600 allows you to add or reconfigure many configuration profiles while guiding you through a larger
configuration sequence for an Alcatel-Lucent AP Group or WLAN. Consider the following example:

When you create a new Alcatel-Lucent AP Group from the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
page, the Referenced Profile section appears as shown in Figure 8:
Figure 8 Embedded Profile Configuration for an Alcatel-Lucent AP Group

Click the Add icon (the plus symbol) at right to add a referenced profile. Once you Save or Save and
Apply that profile, OV3600 automatically returns you to the original Alcatel-Lucent AP Group
configuration page.

This embedded configuration is also supported on the Additional Alcatel-Lucent Profiles section of the
Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config page.
Save, Save and Apply, and Revert Buttons
Several Add or Detail pages in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration include the Save, Save and Apply, and Revert
buttons. These buttons function as follows:

Save—This button saves a configuration but does not apply it, allowing you to return to complete or
apply the configuration at a later time. If you use this button, you may see the following alert on other
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration pages. You can apply the configuration when all changes are complete at a
later time.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration | 17
Figure 9 Unapplied Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Changes Message

Save and Apply —This button saves and applies the configuration with reference to Manage and Monitor
modes. For example, you must click Save and Apply for a configuration profile to propagate to all
devices immediately if the WLAN switch is in Manage mode. If you have devices in Monitor mode,
OV3600 compares the current device configuration with the new desired configuration. For additional
information and instructions about using Manage and Monitor modes, refer to “Pushing Device
Configurations to WLAN switches” on page 31.

Revert—This button cancels out of a new configuration or reverts back to the last saved configuration.
Setting Up Initial Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
This section describes how to deploy an initial setup of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in OV3600 6.3.
Prerequisites

Complete the OV3600 6.3 upgrade from a prior OV3600 version. Refer to “Related Documents” on page 7
for installation or upgrade documents. Upon upgrade to OV3600 Version 6.3, Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration is enabled by default in groups with devices in monitor-only mode and AOS-W firmware of
3.3.2.10 or greater.

Back up your AOS-W WLAN switch configuration file. Information about backing OV3600 is available in
the OV3600 User Guide, Version 6.3, in the “Performing Daily Operations in OV3600” chapter.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to deploy Alcatel-Lucent Configuration when at least one Alcatel-Lucent AP
Group currently exists on at least one Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch on the network:
1. On the Groups > Basic page, enable device preferences for Alcatel-Lucent devices. Figure 10 illustrates this
page. This configuration defines optional group display options. This step is not critical to setup, and
default settings will support groups appropriate for Alcatel-Lucent Configuration. One important setting on
this page is the Alcatel-Lucent GUI Config option. Ensure that setting is Yes, which is the default setting.
Figure 10 Groups > Basic Page Illustration
18 | Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
2. Authorize OmniAccess WLAN switches into the OV3600 Group.
WARNING
When authorizing the first WLAN switch onto a group, you must add the device in monitor-only mode.
Otherwise, OV3600 removes the configuration of the WLAN switch before you have a chance to import the
configuration, and this would remove critical network configuration and status.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration is enabled by default in OV3600.
NOTE
3. Navigate to the AP/s/Devices > Audit page to prepare for importing an existing Alcatel-Lucent WLAN
switch configuration file. Figure 11 illustrates this page.
Figure 11 APs/Devices > Audit Page Illustration
4. Import the Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch settings from an Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch that has already
been configured. Click Import and OV3600 advises you with a confirmation page.
Importing this configuration creates all the Profiles and Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups on the Device Setup >
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page. This action also adds and selects the Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups that
appear on the Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config page.
The folder for all the Profiles and Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups is set to the top folder of the OV3600 user
who imports the configuration. This folder is Top in the case of managing administrators with read/write
privileges.
5. After configuration file import is complete, navigate to the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
page.

This page displays a list of APs authorized on the OV3600 that are using the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group.

The User Role is the Alcatel-Lucent User Role used in firewall settings. For additional information,
refer to “Security > User Roles” on page 124.

The Folder column cites the visibility level to devices in each Alcatel-Lucent AP Group. For additional
information, refer to “Visibility in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 35.
6. Add or modify Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups as required.
a. Navigate to the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups page,
illustrated in Figure 12.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration | 19
Figure 12 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Page
a. Click Add from the Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups page to create a new Alcatel-Lucent AP Group. To edit
an Alcatel-Lucent AP Group, click the pencil icon next to the group. The Details page for the AlcatelLucent AP Group group appears. This page allows you to select the profiles to apply to the AlcatelLucent AP Group, and to select one or more WLANs that support that Alcatel-Lucent AP Group.
Figure 13 illustrates this page.
Figure 13 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups > Add/Edit
Details Page
The following section of this configuration guide provide additional information about configuring
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups:

“General Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Procedures and Guidelines” on page 26
7. Add or edit WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration as required.
a. Navigate to Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs page. This page can display all
WLANs currently configured, or can display only selected WLANs.
20 | Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
b. Click Add to create a new WLAN, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing WLAN.
You can add or edit WLANs in one of two ways, as follows:

Basic—This display is essentially the same as the AOS-W Wizard View on the Alcatel-Lucent
WLAN switch. This page does not require in-depth knowledge of the profiles that define the
Alcatel-Lucent AP Group.

Advanced—This display allows you to select individual profiles that define the WLAN and
associated Alcatel-Lucent AP Group. This page requires in-depth knowledge of all profiles and
their respective settings.
The following sections of this configuration guide provide additional information and illustrations for
configuring WLANs:

“General WLAN Procedures and Guidelines” on page 28

“WLAN Pages and Field Descriptions” on page 45
8. Add or edit Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Profiles as required.
a. Navigate to Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles section of the navigation pane.
b. You must select the type of profile to configure: AAA, AP, IDS, Mesh, QoS, RF, or SSID.
c. Click Add from any of these specific profile pages to create a new profile, or click the pencil icon to
edit an existing profile.
Most profiles in OV3600 are similar to the All Profiles display in the Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch
WebUI. The primary difference in OV3600 is that AAA and SSID profiles are not listed under the
Wireless LAN column as the WLAN switch.
d. Save changes to each element as you proceed through profile and WLAN configuration.
All other settings supported on OmniAccess WLAN switches can be defined on the Device Setup >
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page. The following section in this document provides additional
information about configuring profiles:

“General Profiles Guidelines” on page 31
9. Provision multiple Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups on one or more WLAN switches by putting the WLAN
switches into an OV3600 group and configuring that group to use the selected Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups.
Configure such Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups settings on the Group > Alcatel-Lucent Config page. The
following section of this document provides additional information:

“General Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Procedures and Guidelines” on page 26
10. As required, add or edit AP devices. The following section of this document has additional information:

“Supporting APs with Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 32
11. Each AP can be assigned to a single Alcatel-Lucent AP Group. Make sure to choose an AP Group that has
been configured on that WLAN switch using that WLAN switch's OV3600 Group. Use the APs/Devices >
List, Modify Devices field and the APs/Devices > Manage page. You can create or edit settings such as the
AP name, syslocation, and syscontact on the APs/Devices > Manage page. For additional information,
refer to “Supporting APs with Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 32.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration | 21
Figure 14 APs/Devices > Manage Page Illustration
12. The Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch’s audit page displays all current settings that are mismatched from
desired settings. Navigate to the APs/Devices > Audit page for the WLAN switch to view mismatched
settings. This page provides links to display the current configuration of OmniAccess WLAN switches.
Furthermore, you can display all mismatched devices by toggling to the APs/Devices > Mismatched page.
Figure 15 APs/Devices > Audit Page Illustration (Partial Display)
22 | Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Figure 16 APs/Devices > Mismatched Page Illustration
What Next?
After initial AOS-W deployment with the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration feature, you can make many
additional configurations or continue with maintenance tasks, such as with the following examples:

Once Alcatel-Lucent Configuration is deployed in OV3600, you can perform debugging with Telnet/SSH.
Review the telnet_cmds file in the /var/log folder from the command line interface, or access this file
from the System > Status page. Such configurations are supported on the Groups > Basic and Device
Setup > Communications pages of OV3600. Refer to the OV3600 User Guide, Version 6.3, for additional
information.

To resolve communication issues, review the credentials on the AP Manage page.

Mismatches can occur when importing profiles because OV3600 deletes orphaned profiles, even if
following a new import. To display and resolve mismatched devices, refer to “Pushing Device
Configurations to WLAN switches” on page 31.

Use the Groups > Templates page to configure OmniAccess WLAN switches that use 2.x firmware.
Additional Capabilities of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
OV3600 supports many additional AOS-W configurations and settings. Refer to these additional resources
for more information:

AOS-W User Guide, Release 3.3.2.10

OV3600 User Guide, Version 6.3

Alcatel-Lucent Best Practices Guide
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration | 23
24 | Overview of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Chapter 2
Using Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration in Daily Operations
Introduction
This chapter presents the more common tasks or concepts after initial setup of Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration is complete, as described in the section “Setting Up Initial Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on
page 18. This chapter emphasizes frequent procedures as follows:
General Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Procedures and Guidelines

Guidelines and Pages for Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration

Selecting Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch Groups

Configuring Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups

Retaining Unreferenced Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Profiles
General WLAN Procedures and Guidelines

Guidelines and Pages for WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration

Configuring or Editing WLANs with Basic View

Configuring or Editing WLANs with Advanced View
General WLAN Switch Procedures and Guidelines

Using Master, Standby Master, and Local WLAN Switches in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration

Pushing Device Configurations to WLAN switches
Supporting APs with Alcatel-Lucent Configuration

AP Overrides Guidelines

Configuring or Editing AP Overrides

Changing the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group for an AP Device

Changing Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) Settings

Changing SSID and Encryption Settings
Visibility in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
NOTE

Visibility Overview

Defining Visibility for Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
For a complete reference on all Alcatel-Lucent Configuration pages, field descriptions, and certain additional
procedures that are more specialized, refer to Appendix A, “Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference” on page 39.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations | 25
General Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Procedures and Guidelines
Guidelines and Pages for Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration
The fields and default settings for Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups are described in “Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups”
on page 41.
The following guidelines govern the configuration and use of Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups across OV3600:

Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups function with standard OV3600 groups that contain them. Add Alcatel-Lucent
AP Groups to standard OV3600 groups. Additional procedures in this document explain their
interoperability.

APs can belong to a WLAN switch's OV3600 group or to an OV3600 group by themselves.

All configurations of Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups must be pushed to OmniAccess WLAN switches to
become active on the network.

Additional dynamics between master, standby master, and local WLAN switches still apply. In this case,
refer to “Using Master, Standby Master, and Local WLAN Switches in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on
page 31.
The following pages in OV3600 govern the configuration and use of Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups or standard
device groups across OV3600:

The Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane displays standard AOS-W components
and your custom-configured Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups, WLANs, and AP Overrides.

You define or modify Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups on the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page.
Click Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups from the navigation pane.

You select Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups to associate with OV3600 Groups with the Groups > Alcatel-Lucent
Config page.

You modify devices in Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups with the APs/Devices > List page, clicking Modify These
Devices. This is the page at which you assign devices to a given group and Alcatel-Lucent AP Group.
Selecting Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch Groups
To select Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups, navigate to the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups page. This
page is central to defining Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups, to viewing the OV3600 groups with which an AlcatelLucent AP Group is associated, changing or deleting Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups, and assigning AP devices to
an Alcatel-Lucent AP Group.
Configuring Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups
Perform the following steps to display, add, edit, or delete Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration.
1. Browse to the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page, and click the AP Groups heading in the
navigation pane on the left. The Groups Summary page appears and displays all current Alcatel-Lucent
AP Groups, as illustrated in Figure 17 and described in Table 3 of the Appendix.
26 | Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Figure 17 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Groups Page Illustration
2. To add a new group, click the Add AP Group button.
To edit an existing group, click the pencil icon next to the group name.
The Group Details page appears with current or default configurations. Figure 18 illustrates the Details
page for a new group to be defined. The settings on this page are described in Table 4 of the Appendix.
Figure 18 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, Group Details Page Illustration
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations | 27
3. Click Add or Save to finish creating or editing the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group. Click Cancel to back out of
this screen and to cancel the AP Group configurations.
4. New AP groups appear in the AP Groups section of the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane,
and clicking the group name takes you to the Details page for that group.
5. When this and other procedures are completed, push the configuration to the OmniAccess WLAN
switches by clicking Save and Apply. The principles of Monitor and Manage mode still apply. For
additional information, refer to “Pushing Device Configurations to WLAN switches” on page 31.
What Next?
Once Alcatel-Lucent AP groups are defined, ensure that all desired WLANs are referenced in Alcatel-Lucent
AP Groups, as required. Repeat the above procedure to revise WLANs as required. You can add or edit AP
devices in Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups, and you can configure AP Override settings that allow for custom AP
configuration within the larger group in which it operates.
Retaining Unreferenced Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Profiles
OV3600 supports the ability to retain Alcatel-Lucent Configuration profiles even when they are not used.
Perform these steps to define the retention of unused Alcatel-Lucent Configuration profiles.
1. Navigate to the OV3600 Setup > General page.
2. Locate the Configuration Options section and adjust settings as required. The settings in this field
configure whether certain changes can be pushed to devices in monitor-only mode.
3. In the Configuration Options section, adjust the setting for the Keep Unreferenced Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration field as required.
This setting allows OV3600 to retain unused AOS-W configuration profiles pertaining to Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration. With Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, you can define profiles on an Alcatel-Lucent WLAN
switch but it is not necessary to reference them from a virtual AP configuration or other component of
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration. Normally OV3600 deletes unreferenced profiles, but this setting retains
them when enabled with Yes.
4. Click Save to retain this setting.
General WLAN Procedures and Guidelines
Guidelines and Pages for WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration

The Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane displays custom-configured WLANs
and Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups. You define or modify WLANs on the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration page. Click WLANs from the navigation pane.

You can create or edit any profile in an WLAN as you define or modify that WLAN. If you digress to
profile setup from a different page, OV3600 returns you to your place on the WLAN setup page once you
are done with profile setup.

All configurations must be pushed to OmniAccess WLAN switches to become active on the network.
Configuring or Editing WLANs with Basic View
Perform the following steps to create or configure a basic WLAN in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration.
1. Navigate to the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs page. This page displays currently configured
WLANs. Figure 23 illustrates this page.
28 | Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Figure 19 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs Page Illustration
2. To add a new WLAN, click the Add WLAN button. To edit an existing WLAN, click the pencil icon next to
the WLAN name. Select Basic to define or modify the settings. Otherwise, refer to the “Configuring or
Editing WLANs with Advanced View” on page 30 for additional information. Figure 24 illustrates the
Basic view. For a detailed explanation of all fields, refer to Table 6 in the Appendix.
Figure 20 WLANs > Basic Page Illustration
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited WLAN appears on the WLANs page. You can now use this WLAN
with one or more Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups.
4. Repeat this procedure or continue to additional procedures to complete WLAN, Profile, Alcatel-Lucent
AP Group or other configurations.
5. Push the newly added or edited WLAN to the desired OmniAccess WLAN switches. Refer to “Pushing
Device Configurations to WLAN switches” on page 31.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations | 29
Configuring or Editing WLANs with Advanced View
1. Navigate to the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs page. This page displays currently configured
WLANs. Figure 23 illustrates this page.
Figure 21 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs Page Illustration
2. To add a new WLAN, click the Add WLAN button. To edit an existing WLAN, click the pencil icon next to
the WLAN name. Select Advanced to define or modify the settings that pertain to advanced WLAN
configuration. Figure 24 illustrates the Advanced view. For complete description of all fields on this
page, refer to Table 7 in the Appendix.
Figure 22 WLANs > Advanced Page Illustration
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited WLAN appears on the WLANs page. You can now use this WLAN
with one or more Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups.
30 | Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
4. Repeat this procedure or continue to additional procedures to complete WLAN, Profile, Alcatel-Lucent
AP Group or other configurations.
5. Push the newly added or edited WLAN to the desired OmniAccess WLAN switches. For additional
information, refer to “Pushing Device Configurations to WLAN switches” on page 31.
General Profiles Guidelines
AOS-W elements can be added or edited after an AOS-W configuration file is imported to OV3600 and
pushed to WLAN switches with the steps described in “Setting Up Initial Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on
page 18.
Profiles in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration entail the following concepts or dynamics:

Profiles define nearly all parameters for Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups and WLANs, and Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration supports many diverse profile types.

Some profiles provide the configurations for additional profiles that reference them. When this is the
case, this document describes the interrelationship of such profiles to each other.

Profiles can be configured in standalone fashion using the procedures in this chapter, then applied
elsewhere as desired. Otherwise, you can define referenced profiles as you progress through AlcatelLucent AP Group or WLAN setup. In the latter case, OV3600 takes you to profile setup on separate pages,
then returns you to your place in Alcatel-Lucent AP Group or WLAN setup.
For complete Profiles inventory, refer to “Profiles Pages and Field Descriptions” on page 55.
General WLAN Switch Procedures and Guidelines
Using Master, Standby Master, and Local WLAN Switches in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration
OV3600 implements the following general approaches in relation to WLAN switches.

Master WLAN switch—This WLAN switch maintains and pushes all global configurations. OV3600
pushes configurations only to a master WLAN switch.

Standby WLAN switch—The master WLAN switch synchronizes with the standby master WLAN
switch, which remains ready to govern global configurations for all WLAN switches should the active
master WLAN switch fail.

Local WLAN switch—Master WLAN switches push local configurations to local WLAN switches. Local
WLAN switches retain settings such as the interfaces and global VLANs.
OV3600 is aware of differences in what is pushed to master WLAN switches and local WLAN switches, and
automatically pushes all configurations to the appropriate WLAN switches. Thin AP provisioning is pushed
to the WLAN switch to which a thin AP is connected.
You can determine additional details about what is specific to each WLAN switch by reviewing information
on the Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config page, and the Groups > Monitor page for any specific AP that lists its
master and standby master WLAN switch.
Pushing Device Configurations to WLAN switches
When you add or edit device configurations, you can push device configurations to WLAN switches as
follows:

Make device changes on the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page and click Save and Apply.

Make devices changes on the Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config page and click Save and Apply.
A device must be in Manage mode to push configurations in this way.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations | 31
NOTE
If you click Save and Apply when a device is in Monitor mode, this initiates a verification process in which OV3600
advises you of the latest mismatches. Mismatches are viewable from the APs/Devices > Mismatched page.
Additional Audit and Group pages list mismatched status for devices.
Normally, devices are in Monitor mode. It may be advisable in some circumstances to accumulate several
configuration changes in Monitor mode prior to pushing an entire set of changes to WLAN switches. Follow
these general steps when implementing configuration changes for devices in Monitor mode:
1. Make all device changes using the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page and the Groups >
Alcatel-Lucent Config page. Click Save and Apply as you complete device-level changes. This builds an
inventory of pending configuration changes that have not been pushed to the WLAN switch and APs.
2. Review the entire set of newly mismatched devices on the APs/Devices > Mismatched page.
3. For each mismatched device, navigate to the APs/Devices > Audit page to audit recent configuration
changes as desired.
4. Once all mismatched device configurations are verified to be correct from the APs/Devices > Audit page,
use the Modify Devices link on the Groups > Monitor page to place these devices into Management mode.
This instructs OV3600 to push the device configurations to the WLAN switch.
5. As desired, return devices to Monitor mode until the next set of configuration changes is ready to push to
WLAN switches.
Supporting APs with Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
AP Overrides Guidelines
The AP Override component of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration appears in the navigation pane of the Device
Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page. This component operates with the following principles:

AP devices function within groups that define operational parameters for groups of APs. This is standard
across all of OV3600.

AP Overrides allows you to change some parameters of any given AP without having to remove that AP
from the configuration group in which it operates.

The name of any AP Override that you create should be the same as the name of the AP device to which
it applies. This establishes the basis of all linking to that AP device.

Once you have created an AP Override, you select the WLANs in which it applies.

Once you have created the AP Override, you can go one step further with the Exclude WLANs option of
AP Override, which allows you to exclude certain SSIDs from the AP override. For example, if you have a
set of WLANs with several SSIDs available, the Exclude WLANs option allows you to specify which
SSIDs to exclude from the AP Override.

You can also exclude mesh clusters from the AP Override.
In summary, the AP Override feature prevents you from having to create a new AP group for customized
APs that otherwise share parameters with other APs in a group. AP Override allows you to have less total AP
groups than you might otherwise require.
Configuring or Editing AP Overrides
Perform the following steps to create or edit AP Overrides.
1. Navigate to the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Overrides page. This page displays currently
configured AP overrides. Figure 23 illustrates this page.
32 | Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Figure 23 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, AP Overrides Page Illustration
2. To add a new AP Override, click the Add New AP Override button.
To edit an existing AP Override, click the pencil icon next to the AP Override name.
The details page appears. Figure 24 illustrates the AP Overrides detail view.
Figure 24 AP Overrides Add or Edit Page Illustration (Non-scrolling View)
For a description of all fields on this page, refer to Table 8 in the Appendix.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited AP Override appears on the AP Overrides page.
4. Push the newly added or edited AP Override configuration to the desired OmniAccess WLAN switches.
Refer to “Pushing Device Configurations to WLAN switches” on page 31.
5. Repeat this procedure or continue to additional procedures to complete WLAN, Profile, Alcatel-Lucent
AP Group or other configurations.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations | 33
Changing Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) Settings
You can adjust ARM settings for the radios of a particular Alcatel-Lucent AP Group. To do so, refer to the
following topics that describe ARM in relation to Alcatel-Lucent AP groups and device-level radio settings:

“Configuring Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups” on page 26

“Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups” on page 41

“Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio > ARM” on page 103
Changing SSID and Encryption Settings
You can adjust SSID and Encryption parameters for devices by adjusting the profiles that define these
settings, then applying those profiles to Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups and WLANs that support them. To do so,
refer to the following topics that describe relevant steps and configuration pages:

“Configuring Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups” on page 26

“Guidelines and Pages for WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 28

“Profiles > SSID” on page 111 and related profiles.
Changing the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group for an AP Device
You can change the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group to which an AP device is associated. Perform the
following steps to change the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group for an AP device:
1. As required, review the Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups currently configured in OV3600. Navigate to the
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page, and click Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups from the
navigation pane. This page displays and allows editing for all Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups that are
currently configured in OV3600.
2. Navigate to the APs/Devices > List page to view all devices currently seen by OV3600.
3. If necessary, add the device to OV3600 using the APs/Devices > New page.
To discover additional devices, ensure that the WLAN switch is set to perform a thin AP poll period.
4. On the APs/Devices > List page, you can specify the Group and Folder to which a device belongs. Click
Modify Devices to change more than one device, or click the Wrench icon associated with any specific
device to make changes. The APs/Devices > Manage page appears.
5. In the Settings section of the APs/Devices > Manage page, select the new Alcatel-Lucent AP Group to
assign to the device. Change or adjust any additional settings as desired.
6. Click Save and Apply to retain these settings and to propagate them throughout OV3600, or click one of
the alternate buttons as follows for an alternative change:

Click Revert to cancel out of all changes on this page.

Click Delete to remove this device from OV3600.

Click Ignore to keep the device in OV3600 but to ignore it.

Click Import Settings to define device settings from previously created configurations.

Click Replace Hardware to replace the AP device with a new AP device.

Click Update Firmware to update the Firmware that operates this device.
7. Push this configuration change to the AP WLAN switch that is to support this AP device. For additional
information, refer to “Pushing Device Configurations to WLAN switches” on page 31.
34 | Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Visibility in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Visibility Overview
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration supports device configuration and user information with user roles, AP/
Device access level, and folders. These and additional factors for visibility are as follows:

Administrative and Management users in OV3600 can view the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration page and the APs/Devices > Alcatel-Lucent Config pages.

Administrative users are enabled to view all configurations.

Management users have access to all profiles and Alcatel-Lucent AP groups for their respective
folders.

The Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page has a limit to folder drop-down options for
customers that manage different accounts and different types of users.

Alcatel-Lucent Configuration entails specific user role and security profiles that define some
components of visibility, as follows:


Security > User Roles

Security > Policies
OV3600 continues to support the standard operation of folders, users, and user roles as described in the
OV3600 User Guide.
Defining Visibility for Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Perform these steps to define or adjust visibility for users to manage and support Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration:
1. As required, create a new OV3600 device folder with management access.
a. Navigate to the APs/Device > List page, scroll to the bottom of the page. (An alternate page
supporting new folders is Users > Connected page).
b. Click the Add New Folder link. The Folder detail page appears, as illustrated in Figure 25:
Figure 25 APs/Devices > Add New Folder > Folders Page Illustration
c. Click Add. The APs/Devices > List page reappears. You can view your new folder by selecting it from
the Go to folder drop-down list at the top right of this page. Figure 26 illustrates an unpopulated
device page for an example folder.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations | 35
Figure 26 APs/Devices > List Page With No Devices
2. Add Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch devices to that folder as required. Use the Device Setup > Add page
following instructions available in the OV3600 User Guide, Version 6.3.
3. As required, create or edit a user role that is to have rights and manage privileges required to support
their function in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration.
a. At least one user must have administrative privileges, but several additional users may be required,
with less rights and visibility, to support Alcatel-Lucent Configuration without access to the most
sensitive information, such as SSIDs or other security related data.
b. Navigate to the OV3600 Setup > Roles page, and click Add New Role to create a new role with
appropriate rights, or click the pencil (manage) icon next to an existing role to adjust rights as
required. The Role page appears, illustrated in Figure 27.
Figure 27 OV3600 Setup > Roles > Add/Edit Role Page Illustration
c. As per standard OV3600 configuration, complete the settings on this page. The most important fields
with regard to Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, device visibility and user rights are as follows:

Type—Specify the type of user. Important consideration should be given to whether the user is an
administrative user with universal access, or an AP/Device manager to specialize in device
administration, or additional users with differing rights and access.

AP/Device Access Level—Define the access level that this user is to have in support of
OmniAccess WLAN switches, devices, and general Alcatel-Lucent Configuration operations.

Top Folder—Specify the folder created earlier in this procedure, or specify the Top folder for an
administrative user.
36 | Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
d. Click Add to complete the role creation, or click Save to retain changes to an existing role. The
OV3600 > Setup page now displays the new or revised role.
4. As required, add or edit one or more users to manage and support Alcatel-Lucent Configuration. This
step creates or edits users to have rights appropriate to Alcatel-Lucent Configuration. This user inherits
visibility to OmniAccess WLAN switches and Alcatel-Lucent Configuration data based on the role and
device folder created earlier in this procedure.
a. Navigate to the OV3600 Setup > Users page.
b. Click Add New User, or click the pencil (manage) icon next to an existing user to edit that user.
c. Select the user role created with the prior step, and complete the remainder of this page as per
standard OV3600 configuration. Refer to the OV3600 User Guide, Version 6.3, as required.
5. Observe visibility created or edited with this procedure.
The user, role, and device folder created with this procedure are now available to configure, manage,
and support Alcatel-Lucent Configuration and associated devices according to the visibility defined in
this procedure. Any component of this setup can be adjusted or revised by referring to the steps and
OV3600 pages in this procedure.
6. Add or discover devices for the device folder defined during step 1 of this procedure. Information about
devices is available in the OV3600 User Guide, Version 6.3.
7. Continue to other elements of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, described in this document. Early emphasis
entails creation or editing of Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups and WLANs with which they are associated.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations | 37
38 | Using Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in Daily Operations
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Appendix A
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Reference
Introduction
This appendix describes the pages, field-level settings, and interdependencies of Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration profiles of all types. Additional information is available as follows:

Alcatel-Lucent Configuration components are summarized in “Components of Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration” on page 10.

For procedures that use several of these components, refer to earlier chapters in this document.

For architectural information about AOS-W, refer to the AOS-W User Guide for AOS-W 3.3.2.10.
The default values of profile parameters or functions may differ slightly between AOS-W releases.
NOTE
Access all pages and field descriptions in this appendix from the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration page, illustrated in Figure 28, with the one exception of the additional Groups > Alcatel-Lucent
Config page that you access from the standard OV3600 navigation menu.
Figure 28 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Components
This appendix contains the following organization and topics:
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Pages and Field Descriptions

Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups
WLAN Pages and Field Descriptions

Overview of WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration

WLANs

WLANs > Basic

WLANs > Advanced
AP Overrides Pages and Field Descriptions

AP Overrides
Profiles Pages and Field Descriptions

Understanding Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Profiles

Profiles > AAA
 Profiles > AAA > Captive Portal Auth
 Profiles > AAA > Mac Auth
 Profiles > AAA > Stateful 802.1X Auth
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 39




Profiles > AAA > Wired Auth Profile
Profiles > AAA > VPN Auth
Profiles > AAA > Management Auth
Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth

Profiles > AP
 Profiles > AP > System
 Profiles > AP > Regulatory Domain
 Profiles > AP > AP Wired
 Profiles > AP > AP Ethernet Link
 Profiles > AP > SNMP

Profiles > IDS
 Profiles > IDS > General
 Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching
 Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service
 Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service > Rate Threshold
 Profiles > IDS > Impersonation
 Profiles > IDS > Unauthorized Device

Profiles > Mesh
 Profiles > Mesh > Radio
 Profiles > Mesh > Cluster

Profiles > QoS
 Profiles > QoS > Traffic Management
 Profiles > QoS > VoIP Call Admission Control

Profiles > RF
 Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio
 Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio > ARM
 Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio > High-Throughput (HT) Radio
 Profiles > RF > Event Thresholds
 Profiles > RF > Optimization Profiles

Profiles > SSID
 Profiles > SSID > EDCA AP
 Profiles > SSID > EDCA Station
 Profiles > SSID > HT SSID
Security Pages and Field Descriptions
 Security > User Roles
 Security > User Roles > BW Contracts
 Security > User Roles > VPN Dialers
 Security > Policies
 Security > Policies > Destinations
 Security > Policies > Services
 Security > Server Groups
 Security > Server Groups > LDAP
 Security > Server Groups > RADIUS
 Security > Server Groups > TACACS
 Security > Server Groups > Internal
 Security > Server Groups > XML API
 Security > Server Groups > RFC 3576
 Security > TACACS Accounting

Security > Time Ranges

Security > User Rules
40 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Advanced Services Pages and Field Descriptions
 Advanced Services > IP Mobility

Advanced Services > IP Mobility > Mobility Domain

Advanced Services > VPN Services

Advanced Services > VPN Services > IKE

Advanced Services > VPN Services > L2TP

Advanced Services > VPN Services > PPTP

Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC


Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map
Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map > Transform Set
Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config Page and Section Information
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Pages and Field Descriptions
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups appear at the top of the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane. This
section describes the configuration pages and fields of Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups.
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups
The Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups page displays all configured Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups and enables you to
add or edit Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups. For additional information about using this page, refer to “General
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Procedures and Guidelines” on page 26. Figure 29 illustrates this page and
location.
Figure 29 Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Navigation and Page
The Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups page displays the following information for every group currently configured:
Table 3 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Page
Column
Description
Name
Displays the name of the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group. Click the pencil icon next to any group to
edit.
(Used by)
Group
Displays the OV3600 device groups that define this Alcatel-Lucent AP Group. Click the name
of any group in this column to display the detailed Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config page.
The device groups in this column receive the profile configurations from the associated
Alcatel-Lucent AP Group. Any Alcatel-Lucent AP Group profiles can define device groups.
(Used by)
Number of AP
Displays the number of APs in this Alcatel-Lucent AP Group. A detailed list of each AP by
name can be displayed by navigating to the Groups > List page and selecting that group.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 41
Table 3 Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Page (Continued)
Column
Description
(Used By)
User Role
Displays the user role or roles that support the respective Alcatel-Lucent AP Group, when
defined.
Folder
Displays the folder that is associated with this Alcatel-Lucent AP Group, when defined.
A Top viewable folder for the role is able to view all devices and groups contained by the top
folder. The top folder and its subfolders must contain all of the devices in any of the groups it
can view.
Clicking any folder name takes you to the APs/Devices > List page for folder inventory and
configuration.
Click Add to create a new Alcatel-Lucent AP Group, or click the pencil icon next to an existing AlcatelLucent AP Group to edit that group. The Add/Edit Alcatel-Lucent AP Group page contains the following
fields, describes in Table 4.
Table 4 Device Setup, Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Groups Settings and Default Values
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Displays the folder with which the AP Group is associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders
available for association with the AP Group.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is separate from the
configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can view basic statistics about device, and
define which users have visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Default
Enter the name of the AP Group.
No WLANs
selected
by default
Displays the WLANs currently present in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration. You may select as few or as
many WLANS as desired for which this AP Group is active.
To configure additional WLANs that appear in this section, navigate to the WLANs section of the
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration tool.
General Settings
WLANs
Select WLANs
Referenced Profiles
802.11a Radio
Profile
5_am
Defines AP radio settings for the 5 GHz frequency band, including the Adaptive Radio Management
(ARM) profile and the high-throughput (802.11n) radio profile.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to edit or create additional profile settings in the RF >
802.11a/g Radio page of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration. Click Save on this page to return to the
Add AP Group page.
802.11g Radio
Profile
2.4_am
Defines AP radio settings for the 2.4 GHz frequency band, including the Adaptive Radio
Management (ARM) profile and the high-throughput (802.11n) radio profile. Each 802.11a and
802.11b radio profile includes a reference to an Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) profile.
If you would like the ARM feature to select dynamically the best channel and transmission power for
the radio, verify that the 802.11a/802.11g radio profile references an active and enabled ARM
profile. If you want to manually select a channel for each AP group, create separate 802.11a and
802.11g profiles for each AP group and assign a different transmission channel for each profile.
The drop-down menu displays these options:
 default
 nchannel too high
 nchannel too low
Click the pencil icon next to this field to edit profile settings in the RF > 802.11a/g Radio page of
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP Group page.
42 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 4 Device Setup, Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Groups Settings and Default Values (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
RF Optimization
Profile
default
Enables or disables load balancing based on a user-defined number of clients or degree of AP
utilization on an AP. Use this profile to detect coverage holes, radio interference and STA
association failures and configure Received signal strength indication (RSSI) metrics.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > RF section of Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration, and edit these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP
Group page.
Event
Thresholds
Profile
default
Defines error event conditions, based on a customizable percentage of low-speed frames, nonunicast frames, or fragmented, retry or error frames. The drop-down menu displays these options:
 default
 all additional RF profiles currently configured in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > RF > Events Threshold section of
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and edit these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to
return to the Add AP Group page.
Wired AP Profile
default
Controls whether 802.11 frames are tunneled to the WLAN switch using Generic Routing
Encapsulation (GRE) tunnels, bridged into the local Ethernet LAN (for remote APs), or a configured
for combination of the two (split-mode). This profile also configures the switching mode
characteristics for the port, and sets the port as either trusted or untrusted.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP > Wired page of Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration, and adjust these settings as desired.
Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP Group page.
Ethernet
Interface 0 Link
Profile
default
Sets the duplex mode and speed of AP’s Ethernet link for ethernet interface 0. The configurable
speed is dependent on the port type, and you can define a separate Ethernet Interface profile for
each Ethernet link.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP > Ethernet Link details page of
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to
return to the Add AP Group page.
Ethernet
Interface 1 Link
Profile
default
Sets the duplex mode and speed of AP’s Ethernet link for ethernet interface 1. The configurable
speed is dependent on the port type, and you can define a separate Ethernet Interface profile for
each Ethernet link.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP > Ethernet Link details page of
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to
return to the Add AP Group page.
AP System
Profile
default
Defines administrative options for the WLAN switch, including the IP addresses of the local,
backup, and master WLAN switches, Real-time Locating Systems (RTLS) server values and the
number of consecutive missed heartbeats on a GRE tunnel before an AP reboots traps.
This field is a drop-down menu with the following options:
 Non-integer RTLS Server Station Message Frequency
 Too-high RTLS Server Port
 Too-low AeroScout RTLS Server Port
 Too-low RTLS Server Port
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP > System details page of
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to
return to the Add AP Group page.
Regulatory
Domain Profile
default
Defines an AP’s country code and valid channels for both legacy and high-throughput 802.11a and
802.11b/g radios.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP > Regulatory Domain page of
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to
return to the Add AP Group page.
SNMP Profile
default
Selects the SNMP profile to associate with this AP group. The drop-down menu lists all SNMP
profiles currently enabled in OV3600.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP > SNMP page of Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration, and adjust these settings as desired.
Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP Group page.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 43
Table 4 Device Setup, Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Groups Settings and Default Values (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
VoIP Call
Admission
Control Profile
default
Alcatel-Lucent’s Voice Call Admission Control limits the number of active voice calls per AP by
load-balancing or ignoring excess call requests. This profile enables active load balancing and call
admission controls, and sets limits for the numbers of simultaneous Session Initiated Protocol (SIP),
SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP), Cisco Skinny Client Control Protocol (SCCP), Vocera or New
Office Environment (NOE) calls that can be handled by a single radio.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP > Regulatory Domain page of
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to
return to the Add AP Group page.
802.11g Traffic
Management
Profile
default
Specifies the minimum percentage of available bandwidth to be allocated to a specific SSID when
there is congestion on the wireless network, and sets the interval between bandwidth usage
reports. This setting pertains specifically to 802.11g.
802.11a Traffic
Management
Profile
default
Specifies the minimum percentage of available bandwidth to be allocated to a specific SSID when
there is congestion on the wireless network, and sets the interval between bandwidth usage
reports. This setting pertains specifically to 802.11a.
IDS Profile
default
Selects the IDS profile to be associated with the new AP Group. The drop-down menu contains
these options:
 ids-disabled
 ids-high-setting
 ids -low-setting
 ids-medium-setting
The IDS profiles configure the AP’s Intrusion Detection System features, which detect and disable
rogue APs and other devices that can potentially disrupt network operations. An AP is considered
to be a rogue AP if it is both unauthorized and plugged into the wired side of the network. An AP is
considered to be an interfering AP if it is seen in the RF environment but is not connected to the
wired network.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > IDS page of Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration, and adjust these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP
Group page.
Mesh Radio
Profile
default
Determines many of the settings used by mesh nodes to establish mesh links and the path to the
mesh portal, including the maximum number of children a mesh node can accept, and transmit
rates for the 802.11a and 802.11g radios.
Mesh Cluster Profiles
Add New Mesh
Cluster Profile
N/A
Click to display a new Mesh Cluster Profile section to this page, as illustrated in Figure 33.
Figure 30 Add New Mesh Cluster Profile Illustration
This section has two fields, as follows:
 Mesh Cluster Profile—Drop-down menu displays all supported profiles. Select one from the
menu.
 Priority (1-16)—Type in the priority number for this profile. The priority may be any integer
between 1 to 16.
Complete these fields, click the Add button, and the profile displays as an option in the Mesh
Cluster Profile section, which may be selected for the AP Group to be added or edited.
Click Add to complete the creation or click Save to complete the editing of the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group.
This group now appears in the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page.
44 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
WLAN Pages and Field Descriptions
Overview of WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
You have a wide variety of options for authentication, encryption, access management, and user rights
when you configure a WLAN. However, you must configure the following basic elements:

An SSID that uniquely identifies the WLAN

Layer-2 authentication to protect against unauthorized access to the WLAN

Layer-2 encryption to ensure the privacy and confidentiality of the data transmitted to and from the
network

A user role and virtual local area network (VLAN) for the authenticated client
Refer to the AOS-W User Guide for additional information.
Use the following guidelines when configuring and using WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration:

The Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane displays custom-configured WLANs
and Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups. All other components of the navigation pane are standard across all
deployments of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration.

You define or modify WLANs on the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page. Click WLANs
from the navigation pane.

You can create or edit any profile in an WLAN as you define or modify that WLAN. If you digress to
profile setup from a different page, OV3600 returns you to your place on the WLAN setup page once you
are done with profile setup.
WLANs
The WLANs page displays all configured WLANs in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration and enables you to add or
edit WLANs. For additional information about using this page, refer to “General WLAN Procedures and
Guidelines” on page 28. Figure 29 illustrates this page and location.
Figure 31 WLANs Navigation and Page
The Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs page contains additional information as described in Table 5:
Table 5 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs Page Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Name
Lists the name of the WLAN.
SSID
Lists the SSID currently defined for the WLAN.
Alcatel-Lucent AP
Group
Lists the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group or Groups that use the associated WLAN.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 45
Table 5 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs Page Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Description
AP Override
Lists any AP Override configurations for specific APs on the WLAN and in the respective
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups.
Traffic Management
Lists Traffic Management profiles that are currently configured and deployed on the
WLAN.
Folder
Lists the folder for the WLAN.
You can create new WLANs from this page by clicking the Add button. You can edit an existing WLAN by
clicking the pencil icon for that WLAN.
You have two pages by which to create or edit WLANs: the Basic page and the Advanced page. The
remainder of this section describes these two pages.
WLANs > Basic
From the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs page, click Add to create a new WLAN, or click the pencil
icon to edit an existing WLAN, then click Basic. This page provides a streamlined way to create or edit a
WLAN. Table 6 describes the fields for this page.
Table 6 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs > Basic Page Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the WLAN.
Folder
Top
Displays the folder with which the WLAN is associated. The drop-down
menu displays all folders available for association with the WLAN.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
SSID
N/A
Select the SSID profile that defines encryption, EDCA or high-throughput
SSID parameters. Access these SSID profiles by clicking Profiles > SSID
in the navigation pane at left. For additional information, refer to “Profiles >
EDCA AP” on page 111.
Radio Type
N/A
Define whether the supported radio type on the WLAN is 802.11a,
802.11g, or all.
Enable 802.11n
Yes
Define whether the WLAN is to support 802.11n.
VLAN
1
Select the VLAN ID number to be supported on this WLAN.
Intended Use
Internal
Define whether this WLAN is Internal to the enterprise or to support Guest
users.
Encryption
opensystem
Select one or more encryption types, as desired, to be supported by this
WLAN.
Use Captive Portal
No
Select whether this WLAN will use captive portal authentication. Captive
portal authentication directs clients to a special web page that typically
requires them to enter a username and password before accessing the
network. For additional information about this profile type, refer to “Profiles
> AAA > Captive Portal Auth” on page 58.
46 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 6 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs > Basic Page Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Authenticated User
Role
logon
For the captive portal authentication profile, you specify the previouslycreated auth-guest user role as the default user role for authenticated
captive portal clients and the authentication server group (“Internal”). For
additional information, refer to “Security > User Roles” on page 124.
Click Add to create the WLAN, or click Save to finish reconfiguring an existing WLAN. The WLAN appears
on the WLANs page in the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane.
The alternate way to create or edit WLANs is from the Advanced page. For additional information, refer to
“WLANs > Advanced” on page 47.
WLANs > Advanced
From the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs page, click Add to create a new WLAN, or click the pencil
icon to edit an existing WLAN, then click Advanced. The Advanced page allows you to configure many
more sophisticated settings when creating or editing WLANs. Table 7 describes the fields for this page.
Table 7 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs > Advanced Page Fields
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Displays the folder with which the WLAN is associated. The drop-down
menu displays all folders available for association with the WLAN.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Name of the WLAN.
General Settings
Referenced Profiles
SSID Profile
Select the SSID profile that defines encryption, EDCA or high-throughput
SSID parameters. Access these SSID profiles by clicking Profiles > SSID
in the navigation pane at left. For additional information, refer to “Profiles >
EDCA AP” on page 111.
AAA Profile
Select the AAA profile that defines RADIUS, TACACS+, or other AAA
server configurations for this WLAN. Access these SSID profiles by
clicking Profiles > AAA in the navigation pane at left. For additional
information, refer to “Profiles > AAA” on page 56.
Other Settings
Virtual AP Enable
Yes
Enable this setting to allow virtual AP configurations to be deployed on this
WLAN.
This profile defines your WLAN by enabling or disabling the bandsteering,
fast roaming, and DoS prevention features. It defines radio band,
forwarding mode and blacklisting parameters, and includes references an
AAA Profile, an EDCA Parameters AP Profile and a High-throughput SSID
profile
Allowed Band
all
Select whether this WLAN is to support 802.11a, 802.11g, or both.
VLAN
N/A
Enter the VLAN or range of VLANs to be supported with this WLAN.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 47
Table 7 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs > Advanced Page Fields (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Forward Mode
tunnel
Define whether this WLAN is to support tunnel, bridge, or split-mode IP
forwarding.
Deny Time Range
none
Define the time range restrictions for the roles in this WLAN, if any.
Mobile IP
Yes
Enable or disable mobile IP functions. This setting specifies whether the
WLAN switch is the home agent for a client. When enabled, this setting
detects when a mobile client has moved to a foreign network and
determines the home agent for a roaming client.
HA Discovery on
Association
No
Enable or disable HA discovery on Association. In normal circumstances a
WLAN switch performs an HA discovery only when it is aware of the
client’s IP address which it learns through the ARP or any L3 packet from
the client. This limitation of learning the client’s IP and then performing the
HA discovery is not effective when the client performs an inter switch
move silently (does not send any data packet when in power save mode).
This behavior is commonly seen with various handheld devices, Wi-Fi
phones, etc. This delays HA discovery and eventually resulting in loss of
downstream traffic if any meant for the mobile client.
With HA discovery on association, a WLAN switch can perform a HA
discovery as soon as the client is associated. This feature can be enabled
using the ha-disc-on assoc parameter in the WLAN virtual <approfile> command. By default, this feature is disabled. You can enable
this on virtual APs with devices in power-save mode and requiring mobility.
This option will also poll for all potential HAs.
DoS Prevention
No
Enable or disable DoS prevention functions, as defined in virtual AP
profiles.
Station Blacklisting
Yes
Enable or disable DoS prevention functions, as defined in virtual AP
profiles. The blacklisting option can be used to prevent access to clients
that are attempting to breach the security.
When a client is blacklisted in the Alcatel-Lucent system, the client is not
allowed to associate with any AP in the network for a specified amount of
time. If a client is connected to the network when it is blacklisted, a deauthentication message is sent to force the client to disconnect. While
blacklisted, the client cannot associate with another SSID in the network.
Blacklist Time
3600
If station blacklisting is enabled, specify the time in seconds for which
blacklisting is enabled. When a client is blacklisted in the Alcatel-Lucent
system, the client is not allowed to associate with any AP in the network
for a specified amount of time.
Authentication
Failure Blacklist
Time
3600
You can configure a maximum authentication failure threshold in seconds
for each of the following authentication methods:
 802.1x
 MAC
 Captive portal
 VPN
When a client exceeds the configured threshold for one of the above
methods, the client is automatically
blacklisted by the WLAN switch, an event is logged, and an SNMP trap is
sent. By default, the maximum authentication failure threshold is set to 0
for the above authentication methods, which means that there is no limit to
the number of times a client can attempt to authenticate.
With 802.1x authentication, you can also configure blacklisting of clients
who fail machine authentication.
NOTE: This requires that the External Services Interface (ESI) license be
installed in the WLAN switch.
NOTE: When clients are blacklisted because they exceed the
authentication failure threshold, they are blacklisted indefinitely by default.
You can configure the duration of the blacklisting;
48 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 7 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs > Advanced Page Fields (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Fast Roaming
No
Fast roaming is a component of virtual AP profiles in which client devices
are allowed to roam from one access point to another without requiring
reauthentication by the main RADIUS server.
Strict Compliance
No
Define whether clients should have strict adherence to settings on this
page for network access.
VLAN Mobility
No
Define whether clients in the WLAN and VLAN should have mobility or
roaming privileges.
Remote AP
Operation
standard
Drop Broadcast and
Multicast
No
Specify whether the WLAN should drop broadcast and multicast mesh
network advertising on the WLAN.
Convert Broadcast
ARP Requests to
Unicast
No
Specify whether ARP table information should be distributed in broadcast
(default) or unicast fashion.
Band Steering
No
Enable or disable band steering on the WLAN. Band steering reduces cochannel interference and increases available bandwidth for dual-band
clients, because there are more channels on the 5GHz band than on the
2.4GHz band. Dual-band 802.11n-capable clients may see even greater
bandwidth improvements, because the band steering feature will
automatically select between 40MHz or 20MHz channels in 802.11n
networks. This feature is disabled by default, and must be enabled in a
Virtual AP profile.
Define the rights for remote APs in this WLAN. Options are as follows:
standard
 persistent
 backup
 always
Remote APs connect to a WLAN switch using Layer-2 Tunneling Protocol
and Internet Protocol Security (L2TP/IPSec). AP control and 802.11 data
traffic are carried through this tunnel. Secure Remote Access Point Service
extends the corporate office to the remote site. Remote users can use the
same features as corporate office users. For example, voice over IP (VoIP)
applications can be extended to remote sites while the servers and the
PBX remain secure in the corporate office.
Secure Remote Access Point Service can also be used to secure control
traffic between an AP and the WLAN switch in a corporate environment. In
this case, both the AP and WLAN switch are in the company’s private
address space.

Click Add to create the WLAN, or click Save to finish reconfiguring an existing WLAN. The WLAN appears
on the WLANs page in the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane.
The alternate way to create or edit WLANs is from the Basic page.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 49
AP Overrides Pages and Field Descriptions
The AP Overrides component of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration allow you to define device-specific settings
for an AP device without having to remove that device from an existing Alcatel-Lucent AP Group or create a
new Alcatel-Lucent AP Group specifically for that device. The AP Overrides page is for custom AP devices
that otherwise comply with most settings in the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group in which it is managed.
AP Overrides
The AP Overrides page displays all AP overrides that are currently configured. These overrides also appear
in the navigation pane at left. The name of any override matches the AP device name.
Figure 32 AP Overrides Page
Table 8 describes the fields on this page.
Table 8 AP Overrides Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Name
Displays the name of the AP Overrides profile. This name matches the name of the
specific AP device that it defines.
Used By (Group)
Displays the name of and link to the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group in which this AP Override
applies. Additional details about the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group appear on the Groups >
Alcatel-Lucent Config page when you click the name of the group.
Folder
Displays the folder associated with the AP Overrides profile. The folder establishes the
visibility of this profile to users.
Click Add on the AP Overrides page to create a new AP Override, or click the pencil icon next to an existing
override to edit that override.Table 9 describes the fields on the AP Overrides > Add/Edit Details page.
Table 9 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Overrides Add or Edit Page Fields
Field
Default
Description
Name
Blank
Name of the AP Override. Use the name of the AP device to which it
applies.
Folder
Top
Displays the folder with which the WLAN is associated. The drop-down
menu displays all folders available for association with the WLAN.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
50 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 9 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Overrides Add or Edit Page Fields
Field
Default
Description
N/A
This section lists the WLANs currently defined in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration by default. You can display selected WLANs or all WLANs.
WLANs
WLANs
Select one or more WLANs for which AP Override is to apply.
Excluded WLANs
Excluded WLANs
N/A
This section displays WLANs currently defined in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration by default. This section can display selected WLANs or all
WLANs. Use this section to specify which WLANs are not to support AP
Override.
5_am
Defines AP radio settings for the 5 GHz frequency band, including the
Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) profile and the high-throughput
(802.11n) radio profile.
Referenced Profiles
802.11a Radio
Profile
Click the pencil icon next to this field to edit or create additional profile
settings in the RF > 802.11a/g Radio page of Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP Group
page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio” on
page 101.
802.11g Radio
Profile
2.4_am
Defines AP radio settings for the 2.4 GHz frequency band, including the
Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) profile and the high-throughput
(802.11n) radio profile. Each 802.11a and 802.11b radio profile includes a
reference to an Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) profile.
If you would like the ARM feature to select dynamically the best channel
and transmission power for the radio, verify that the 802.11a/802.11g radio
profile references an active and enabled ARM profile. If you want to
manually select a channel for each AP group, create separate 802.11a and
802.11g profiles for each AP group and assign a different transmission
channel for each profile.
The drop-down menu displays these options:
default
 nchannel too high
 nchannel too low

Click the pencil icon next to this field to edit or create additional profile
settings in the RF > 802.11a/g Radio page of Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP Group
page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio” on
page 101.
RF Optimization
Profile
default
Enables or disables load balancing based on a user-defined number of
clients or degree of AP utilization on an AP. Use this profile to detect
coverage holes, radio interference and STA association failures and
configure Received signal strength indication (RSSI) metrics.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > RF section
of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and edit these settings as desired. Click
Save on this page to return to the Add AP Group page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio” on
page 101.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 51
Table 9 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Overrides Add or Edit Page Fields
Field
Default
Description
Event Thresholds
Profile
default
Defines error event conditions, based on a customizable percentage of
low-speed frames, non-unicast frames, or fragmented, retry or error
frames. The drop-down menu displays these options:
 default
 all additional RF profiles currently configured in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > RF >
Events Threshold section of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and edit
these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP
Group page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > RF > Event Thresholds” on
page 107.
Wired AP Profile
default
Controls whether 802.11 frames are tunneled to the WLAN switch using
Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) tunnels, bridged into the local
Ethernet LAN (for remote APs), or a configured for combination of the two
(split-mode). This profile also configures the switching mode
characteristics for the port, and sets the port as either trusted or untrusted.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP > Wired
page of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust these settings as
desired.
Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP Group page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > AP > AP Wired” on page 75.
Ethernet Interface 0
Link Profile
default
Sets the duplex mode and speed of AP’s Ethernet link for ethernet
interface 0. The configurable speed is dependent on the port type, and you
can define a separate Ethernet Interface profile for each Ethernet link.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP >
Ethernet Link details page of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust
these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP
Group page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > AP > AP Ethernet Link” on
page 76.
Ethernet Interface 1
Link Profile
default
Sets the duplex mode and speed of AP’s Ethernet link for ethernet
interface 1. The configurable speed is dependent on the port type, and you
can define a separate Ethernet Interface profile for each Ethernet link.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP >
Ethernet Link details page of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust
these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP
Group page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > AP > AP Ethernet Link” on
page 76.
AP System Profile
default
Defines administrative options for the WLAN switch, including the IP
addresses of the local, backup, and master WLAN switches, Real-time
Locating Systems (RTLS) server values and the number of consecutive
missed heartbeats on a GRE tunnel before an AP reboots traps.
This field is a drop-down menu with the following options:
 Non-integer RTLS Server Station Message Frequency
 Too-high RTLS Server Port
 Too-low AeroScout RTLS Server Port
 Too-low RTLS Server Port
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP >
System details page of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust these
settings as desired. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP
Group page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > AP > System” on page 70.
52 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 9 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Overrides Add or Edit Page Fields
Field
Default
Description
Regulatory Domain
Profile
default
Defines an AP’s country code and valid channels for both legacy and highthroughput 802.11a and 802.11b/g radios.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP >
Regulatory Domain page of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust
these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP
Group page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > AP > Regulatory Domain” on
page 73.
SNMP Profile
default
Selects the SNMP profile to associate with this AP group. The drop-down
menu lists all SNMP profiles currently enabled in OV3600.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP > SNMP
page of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust these settings as
desired.
Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP Group page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > AP > SNMP” on page 77.
VoIP Call
Admission Control
Profile
default
Alcatel-Lucent’s Voice Call Admission Control limits the number of active
voice calls per AP by load-balancing or ignoring excess call requests. This
profile enables active load balancing and call admission controls, and sets
limits for the numbers of simultaneous Session Initiated Protocol (SIP),
SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP), Cisco Skinny Client Control Protocol
(SCCP), Vocera or New Office Environment (NOE) calls that can be
handled by a single radio.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > AP >
Regulatory Domain page of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust
these settings as desired. Click Save on this page to return to the Add AP
Group page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > AP > SNMP” on page 77.
802.11g Traffic
Management Profile
default
Specifies the minimum percentage of available bandwidth to be allocated
to a specific SSID when there is congestion on the wireless network, and
sets the interval between bandwidth usage reports. This setting pertains
specifically to 802.11g.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > QoS > Traffic Management”
on page 97
802.11a Traffic
Management Profile
default
Specifies the minimum percentage of available bandwidth to be allocated
to a specific SSID when there is congestion on the wireless network, and
sets the interval between bandwidth usage reports. This setting pertains
specifically to 802.11a.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > QoS > Traffic Management”
on page 97
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 53
Table 9 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Overrides Add or Edit Page Fields
Field
Default
Description
IDS Profile
default
Selects the IDS profile to be associated with the new AP Group. The dropdown menu contains these options:
 ids-disabled
 ids-high-setting
 ids -low-setting
 ids-medium-setting
The IDS profiles configure the AP’s Intrusion Detection System features,
which detect and disable rogue APs and other devices that can potentially
disrupt network operations. An AP is considered to be a rogue AP if it is
both unauthorized and plugged into the wired side of the network. An AP is
considered to be an interfering AP if it is seen in the RF environment but is
not connected to the wired network.
Click the pencil icon next to this field to display the Profiles > IDS page of
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, and adjust these settings as desired. Click
Save on this page to return to the Add AP Group page.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > IDS” on page 81
Mesh Radio Profile
default
Determines many of the settings used by mesh nodes to establish mesh
links and the path to the mesh portal, including the maximum number of
children a mesh node can accept, and transmit rates for the 802.11a and
802.11g radios.
For additional information, refer to “Profiles > Mesh” on page 94.
The Add
Mesh Cluster
Profile section
is hidden by
default, until
the Add
button is
clicked.
Clicking this Add button displays a new Mesh Cluster Profile section to
this page, as illustrated in Figure 33.
Mesh Cluster Profiles
Add New Mesh
Cluster Profile
Figure 33 Add New Mesh Cluster Profile Illustration
This section has two fields, as follows:
 Mesh Cluster Profile—Drop-down menu displays all supported
profiles. Select one from the menu.
 Priority (1-16)—Type in the priority number for this profile. The priority
may be any integer between 1 to 16.
Complete these fields, click the Add button, and the profile displays as an
option in the Mesh Cluster Profile section, which may be selected for the
AP Group to be added or edited.
For additional information about Mesh Cluster profiles, refer to these
sections:
 “Profiles > Mesh” on page 94
 “Profiles > Mesh > Cluster” on page 96.
Excluded Mesh Cluster Profiles
Excluded Mesh
Cluster Profiles
If required, select one or more Mesh Cluster profiles from this field. This
field can display all Mesh Cluster profiles or can display only selected
Mesh Cluster profiles. For additional information about Mesh Cluster
profiles, refer to “Profiles > Mesh > Cluster” on page 96.
Click Add to complete the creation of the new AP Overrides profile, or click Save to preserve changes to an
existing AO Overrides profile. The AP Overrides page and the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane
display the name of the AP Overrides profile.
54 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles Pages and Field Descriptions
Understanding Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Profiles
In AOS-W, related configuration parameters are grouped into a profile that you can apply as needed to an
AP group or to individual APs. This section lists each category of AP profiles that you can configure and
then apply to an AP group or to an individual AP. Note that some profiles reference other profiles. For
example, a virtual AP profile references SSID and AAA profiles, while an AAA profile can reference an
802.1x authentication profile and server group.
You can apply the following types of profiles to an AP or AP group. See Figure 35. For additional details and
configuration instructions, continue to the related procedures in this section.
Perform the following initial steps to configure profiles.
1. Browse to the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page, and click the Profiles heading in the
navigation pane on the left. Figure 34 illustrates general profile categories.
Figure 34 Profiles in the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Navigation Pane
2. Expand the Profiles menu by clicking the plus sign (+) next to it. Several profile options appear, as
illustrated in Figure 35.
Figure 35 Profile Navigation Pane of the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Tool
This document section describes the profiles and settings supported in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 55
Profiles > AAA
This profile type defines authentication settings for the WLAN users, including the role for unauthenticated
users, and the different roles that should be assigned to users authenticated via 802.1x, MAC or SIP
authentication. Perform these steps to determine the need for and to configure AAA profiles.
1. To view and configure AAA profiles, click the AAA profile heading in the navigation pane. The
AAA Profiles page appears and lists the current profiles. Figure 36 illustrates this page.
Figure 36 AAA Profiles Page of Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
2. From the navigation pane, you can configure the following profile types:








AAA Profile—The AAA profile defines the authentication method and the default user role for
unauthenticated users. This profile type references additional profiles. Refer to “Profiles > AAA” on
page 57.
Captive Portal Auth—Captive portal authentication directs clients to a special web page that
typically requires them to enter a username and password before accessing the network. This profile
defines login wait times and the URLs for login and welcome pages, and manages the default user
role for authenticated captive portal clients. You can also use this profile to set the maximum number
of authentication failures allowed per user before that user is blacklisted. This profile includes a
reference to an Server group profile. Refer to “Profiles > AAA > Captive Portal Auth” on page 58.
MAC Auth—Defines parameters for MAC address authentication, including the case of MAC string
(upper- or lower-case), the format of the diameters in the string, and the maximum number of
authentication failures before a user is blacklisted. Refer to “Profiles > AAA > Mac Auth” on page 60.
Stateful 802.11 Auth—Enables or disables 802.1x authentication for clients on non-Alcatel-Lucent
APs, and defines the default role for those users once they are authenticated. This profile also
references a server group to be used for authentication. Refer to “Profiles > AAA > Stateful 802.1X
Auth” on page 61.
Wired Auth—This profile merely references an AAA profile to be used for wired authentication.
Refer to “Profiles > AAA > Wired Auth Profile” on page 62.
VPN Auth—Identifies the default role for authenticated VPN clients. This profile also references a
server group. Refer to “Profiles > AAA > VPN Auth” on page 62.
Management Auth—Enables or disables management authentication, and identifies the default
role for authenticated management clients. This profile also references a server group. Refer to
“Profiles > AAA > Management Auth” on page 63.
802.1x Auth—Manages settings for the 802.11k protocol. In a 802.1k network, if the AP with the
strongest signal is reaches its maximum capacity, clients may connect to an under utilized AP with a
weaker signal under utilized APs. Refer to “Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth” on page 64.
56 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > AAA
Perform these steps to configure a Captive Portal Authentication profile.
1. Click Profiles > AAA in the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new AAA profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to
edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 11.
Table 10 Captive Portal Auth Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the AAA profile.
MAC Authentication
Profile
None
Select a MAC Authentication profile to be referenced by the AAA profile
being configured. If necessary, click the pencil or add icon to add or edit a
MAC Authentication profile. Refer to “Profiles > AAA > Mac Auth” on
page 60 if required.
MAC Authentication
Server Group
default
Select a MAC Authentication server group. You can add a new server
group by clicking the add icon or edit an existing server group by clicking
the pencil icon.
802.1X Authentication
Profile
None
Select the 802.1X Authentication Profile to be referenced by the AAA
profile being configured. You can add a new profile by clicking the add
icon or edit an existing profile by clicking the pencil icon. Refer to “Profiles
> AAA > 802.1x Auth” on page 64.
802.1X
Authentication
Server Group
None
Select the 802.1X Authentication server group. You can add a new server
group by clicking the add icon or edit an existing server group by clicking
the pencil icon.
RADIUS Accounting
Server Group
None
Select the RADIUS accounting server group to be referenced by the AAA
profile being configured. Click the add icon to create a new RADIUS server
group.
Initial Role
ap-role
Select the initial role to be referenced by the AAA profile being configured.
Add a new role by clicking the add icon, or edit an existing role by clicking
the pencil icon.
MAC Authentication
Default Role
ap-role
Select the MAC authentication default role to be referenced by the AAA
profile being configured. Add a new role by clicking the add icon, or edit an
existing role by clicking the pencil icon. This setting requires a policy
enforcement firewall license.
802.1X
Authentication
Default Role
ap-role
Select the 802.1X authentication default role to be referenced by the AAA
profile being configured. Add a new role by clicking the add icon, or edit an
existing role by clicking the pencil icon. This setting requires a policy
enforcement firewall license.
General Settings
Referenced Profiles
Other Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 57
Table 10 Captive Portal Auth Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
User Derivation
Rules
None
Select the user derivation rules to be referenced by the AAA profile being
configured. User derivation rules are executed before client authentication.
The user role can be derived from attributes from the client’s association
with an AP. You configure the user role to be derived by specifying
condition rules; when a condition is met, the specified user role is assigned
to the client. You can specify more than one condition rule; the order of
rules is important as the first matching condition is applied.
Add a new rule by clicking the add icon, or edit an existing rule by clicking
the pencil icon.
Wired to Wireless
Roaming
Yes
Enable or disable support for roaming from wired to wireless networks.
SIP Authentication
Role
None
Select the role to function for SIP authentication. The WLAN switch
supports the stateful tracking of session initiation protocol (SIP)
authentication between a SIP client and a SIP registry server. Upon
successful registration, a user role is assigned to the SIP client. Click the
add icon to create a new role, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing
role.
This setting requires a voice service license.
N/A
Select the XML API server to support the AAA profile being configured, if
required. This section is blank if there are no XML API servers.
N/A
Select the RFC 3576 RADIUS server to support the AAA profile being
configured, if required. This section is blank if there are no such servers.
XML API Servers
XML API Servers
RFC 3576 Servers
RFC 3576 Servers
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited AAA profile appears on the AAA Profiles page.
Profiles > AAA > Captive Portal Auth
In this section, you create an instance of the captive portal authentication profile and the AAA profile. For
the captive portal authentication profile, you specify the previously-created auth-guest user role as the
default user role for authenticated captive portal clients and the authentication server group (“Internal”).
Perform these steps to configure a Captive Portal Authentication profile.
1. Click Profiles > AAA > Captive Portal Auth in the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Captive Portal Auth profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing
profile to edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 11.
Table 11 Captive Portal Auth Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters
that is separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using
folders, you can view basic statistics about device, and define which
users have visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the Captive Port Authentication profile.
General Settings
58 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 11 Captive Portal Auth Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
default
Enter the name of the internal VPN authentication server group, or the
server group that performs 802.1x authentication.
Default Role
default
Role assigned to the Captive Portal user upon login. When both user
and guest logon are enabled, the default role applies to the user
logon; users logging in using the guest interface are assigned the
guest role. The Policy Enforcement Firewall license must be installed.
Redirect Pause
(0-60 sec)
10
Time, in seconds, that the system remains in the initial welcome page
before redirecting the user to the final web URL. If set to 0, the
welcome page displays until the user clicks on the indicated link.
User Login
Yes
Enables Captive Portal with authentication of user credentials.
Guest Login
No
Enables Captive Portal logon without authentication.
Logout Popup
Window
Yes
Enables a pop-up window with the Logout link for the user to logout
after logon. If this is disabled, The user remains logged in until the
user timeout period has elapsed or the station reloads.
Use HTTP
Authentication
No
Use HTTP protocol on redirection to the Captive Portal page. If you
use this option, modify the captive portal policy to allow HTTP traffic.
Logon Wait Minimum
Wait (1-10 sec)
5
Minimum time, in seconds, the user will have to wait for the logon
page to pop up if the CPU load is high. This works in conjunction with
the Logon wait CPU utilization threshold parameter.
Logon Wait
Maximum Wait
(0-10 sec)
10
Maximum time, in seconds, the user will have to wait for the logon
page to pop up if the CPU load is high. This works in conjunction with
the Logon wait CPU utilization threshold parameter.
Logon Wait CPU
Utilization Threshold
(0-100 sec)
60
CPU utilization percentage above which the Logon wait interval is
applied when presenting the user with the logon page.
Max Authentication
Failures
0
Maximum number of authentication failures before the user is
blacklisted.
Show FQDN
No
Allows the user to see and select the fully-qualified domain name
(FQDN) on the login page.
Use CHAP
(Non-standard)
No
Use CHAP protocol. You should not use this option unless instructed
to do so by an Alcatel-Lucent representative.
Sygate-on-demandagent
No
Enables client remediation with Sygate-on-demand-agent (SODA).
Login Page
/auth/index.html
URL of the page that appears for the user logon. This can be set to
any URL.
Welcome Page
/auth/
welcome.html
URL of the page that appears after logon and before redirection to the
web URL. This can be set to any URL.
Referenced Profiles
Server Group
Other Settings
Show Welcome Page Yes
Enables the display of the welcome page. If this option is disabled,
redirection to the web URL happens immediately after logon.
No
Select this option to send the WLAN switch’s IP address in the
redirection URL when external captive portal servers are used. An
external captive portal server can determine the WLAN switch from
which a request originated by parsing the ‘switchip’ variable in the
URL.
Adding Switch IP
Address in
Redirection URL
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Captive Portal Auth profile appears on the AAA Profiles page.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 59
Modifying the Initial User Role
The captive portal authentication profile specifies the captive portal login page and other configurable
parameters. The initial user role configuration must include the applicable captive portal authentication
profile instance. Therefore, you need to modify the guest-logon user role configuration to include the
guestnet captive portal authentication profile.
Profiles > AAA > Mac Auth
Before configuring MAC-based authentication, you must configure the following:

The user role that will be assigned as the default role for the MAC-based authenticated clients. You
configure the default user role for MAC-based authentication in the AAA profile. If derivation rules exist
or if the client configuration in the internal database has a role assignment, these values take precedence
over the default user role.

Authentication server group that the WLAN switch uses to validate the clients. The internal database can
be used to configure the clients for MAC-based authentication.
Perform these steps to configure a Mac Auth profile.
1. Click Profiles > AAA > Mac Auth in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Mac Auth profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile
to edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 12:
Table 12 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > MAC Auth Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters
that is separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using
folders, you can view basic statistics about device, and define
which users have visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the MAC Auth profile.
Delimiter
none
Delimiter used in the MAC string:
 colon specifies the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
 dash specifies the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
 none specifies the format xxxxxxxxxxxx
Case
lower
The case (upper or lower) used in the MAC string.
Max Authentication
Failures (0-10)
0
Number of times a station can fail to authenticate before it is
blacklisted. A value of 0 disables blacklisting.
General Settings
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Mac Auth profile appears on the AAA Profiles page, and on the
MAC Auth details page.
60 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > AAA > Stateful 802.1X Auth
This profile type enables or disables 802.1x authentication for clients on non-Alcatel-Lucent APs, and
defines the default role for those users once they are authenticated. This profile also references a server
group to be used for authentication.
Perform these steps to configure a Stateful 802.1X Auth profile.
1. Click Profiles > AAA > Stateful 802.11 Auth in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Stateful 802.11 Auth profile, or click the pencil icon next to an
existing profile to edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings described in Table 13:
Table 13 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > Stateful 802.1X Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that
is separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you
can view basic statistics about device, and define which users have
visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
N/A
Select the AAA authentication server group. Click the pencil icon to edit
an existing server group or click the add icon to create a new server
group.
Default Role
ap-role
The user role to be associated with this authentication profile.
Timeout (1-20 sec)
10
Maximum time, in seconds, that the server waits before timing out the
request.
Enabled
No
When enabled with Yes, activates the authentication server.
General Settings
Referenced Profiles
Server Group
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Stateful 802.11 Auth profile appears on the AAA Profiles page,
and on the Stateful 802.11 Auth details page.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 61
Profiles > AAA > Wired Auth Profile
This profile type merely references an AAA profile to be used for wired authentication.
Perform these steps to configure a Wired Auth profile.
1. Click Profiles > AAA > Wired Auth in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Wired Auth profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing
profile to edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 14:
Table 14 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > Wired Auth Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the Wired Authentication profile.
None
From the drop-down menu, select the AAA profile for wired authentication.
Click the pencil icon to edit an existing profile or click the add icon to
create a new profile.
General Settings
Referenced Profiles
AAA
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Wired Auth profile appears on the AAA Profiles page, and on the
Wired Auth details page.
Profiles > AAA > VPN Auth
A VPN Authentication profile identifies the default role for authenticated VPN clients. This profile also
references a server group.
Before you enable VPN authentication, you must configure the authentication server(s) and server group
that the WLAN switch will use to validate the remote AP. When you provision the remote AP, you configure
IPSec settings for the AP, including the username and password. This username and password must be
validated by an authentication server before the remote AP is allowed to establish a VPN tunnel to the
WLAN switch. The authentication server can be any type of server supported by the WLAN switch,
including the WLAN switch’s internal database.
Perform these steps to configure a VPN Auth profile.
1. Click Profiles > AAA > VPN Auth in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new VPN Auth profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile
to edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 15:
62 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 15 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > VPN Auth Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
N/A
Select the AAA authentication server group. Click the pencil icon to edit an
existing server group or click the add icon to create a new server group.
Default Role
ap-role
Select the role to be associated with this authentication profile.
Max Authentication
failures (0-10)
0
Enter the number of times a station can fail to authenticate before it is
blacklisted. A value of 0 disables blacklisting.
General Settings
Referenced Profiles
Server Group
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited VPN Auth profile appears on the AAA Profiles page, and on the
VPN Auth details page.
Profiles > AAA > Management Auth
Users who need to access the WLAN switch to monitor, manage, or configure the Alcatel-Lucent usercentric network can be authenticated with RADIUS, TACACS+, or LDAP servers or the internal database.
Perform these steps to configure a Management Auth profile.
1. Click Profiles > AAA > Management Auth in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Management Auth profile, or click the pencil icon next to an
existing profile to edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in
Table 16:
Table 16 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > Management Auth Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters
that is separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using
folders, you can view basic statistics about device, and define
which users have visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
General Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 63
Table 16 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > Management Auth Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
N/A
Select the AAA authentication server group. Click the pencil icon to
edit an existing server group or click the add icon to create a new
server group.
Default Role
ap-role
The role to be associated with this authentication profile.
Enable
No
When enabled with Yes, this setting activates the authentication
server.
Referenced Profiles
Server Group
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Management Auth profile appears on the AAA Profiles page, and
on the Management Auth details page.
Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth
802.1x authentication consists of three components:

The supplicant, or client, is the device attempting to gain access to the network. You can configure the
Alcatel-Lucent user-centric network to support 802.1x authentication for wired users as well as wireless
users.

The authenticator is the gatekeeper to the network and permits or denies access to the supplicants. The
Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch acts as the authenticator, relaying information between the authentication
server and supplicant. The EAP type must be consistent between the authentication server and
supplicant and is transparent to the WLAN switch.

The authentication server provides a database of information required for authentication and informs
the authenticator to deny or permit access to the supplicant.
The 802.1x authentication server is typically an EAP-compliant Remote Access Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) server which can authenticate either users (through passwords or certificates) or the client
computer.
An example of an 802.1x authentication server is the Internet Authentication Service (IAS) in Windows (see
http://technet2.microsoft.com/windowsserver/en/technologies/ias.mspx).
In Alcatel-Lucent user-centric networks, you can terminate the 802.1x authentication on the WLAN switch.
The WLAN switch passes user authentication to its internal database or to a “backend” non-802.1x server.
This feature, also called “AAA FastConnect,” is useful for deployments where an 802.1x EAP-compliant
RADIUS server is not available or required for authentication.
Perform these steps to configure an 802.1X Auth profile.
1. Click Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. The details page summarizes
the current profiles of this type.
2. Click the Add button to create a new 802.1x Auth profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing
profile to edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 17:
64 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 17 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Max Authentication
Failures
0
Number of times a user can try to login with wrong credentials after which
the user will be blacklisted as a security threat.
Set to 0 to disable blacklisting, otherwise enter a non-zero integer to
blacklist the user after the specified number of failures.
This setting requires a wireless intrusion protection license.
Enforce Machine
Authentication
No
(For Windows environments only) Select this option to enforce machine
authentication before user authentication. If selected, either the Machine
Authentication Default Role or the User Authentication Default Role is
assigned to the user, depending on which authentication is successful.
This setting requires a policy enforcement firewall license.
Machine
Authentication:
Default Machine
Role
ap-role
Select the default role to be assigned to the user after completing machine
authentication.
Machine
Authentication
Cache Timeout
(1-1000 hrs)
24
When a Windows device boots, it logs onto the network domain using a
machine account. Within the domain, the device is authenticated before
computer group policies and software settings can be executed; this
process is known as machine authentication. Machine authentication
ensures that only authorized devices are allowed on the network.
You can configure 802.1x for both user and machine authentication (select
the Enforce Machine Authentication option described in Table 51 on page
272). This tightens the authentication process further since both the device
and user need to be authenticated.
Role Assignment with Machine Authentication Enabled
When you enable machine authentication, there are two additional roles
you can define in the 802.1x authentication profile:
 Machine authentication default machine role
 Machine authentication default user role
While you can select the same role for both options, you should define the
roles as per the polices that need to be enforced. Also, these roles can be
different from the 802.1x authentication default role configured in the AAA
profile.
With machine authentication enabled, the assigned role depends upon the
success or failure of the machine and user authentications. In certain
cases, the role that is ultimately assigned to a client can also depend upon
attributes returned by the authentication server or server derivation rules
configured on the WLAN switch.
This setting requires a policy enforcement firewall license.
Blacklist on
Machine
Authentication
Failure
No
Define whether the user is blacklisted upon authentication failure.
This setting requires a policy enforcement firewall license.
General Settings
Other Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 65
Table 17 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Machine
Authentication:
Default User Role
ap-role
Select the default role to be assigned to the user after completing 802.1x
authentication.
This setting requires a policy enforcement firewall license.
Interval Between
Identity Requests
(1-65535 sec)
30
Specify the interval in which identity requests are to be spaced between
each other.
Quiet Period after
Failed
Authentication
(1-65535 sec)
30
Specify the amount of time in seconds in which failed authentication
denies access to a user, after failed authentication.
Reauthentication
Interval
(60-864000 sec
86,400
seconds
Select this option to force the client to do a 802.1x re-authentication after
the expiration of the default timer for re-authentication. The default value
of the timer (Reauthentication Interval) is 24 hours. If the user fails to reauthenticate with valid credentials, the state of the user is cleared.
If derivation rules are used to classify 802.1x-authenticated users, then the
Reauthentication timer per role overrides this setting.
Use Server
Provided
Reauthentication
Interval
No
802.1x re-authentication can be attempted after the expiration of the
default timer for re-authentication. Specify whether this is to be supported
from the authentication server.
Multicast Key
Rotation
(60-864000 sec)
No
Define whether Multicast Key Rotation is enabled or disabled.
When enabled, unicast and multicast keys are updated after each
reauthorization. It is a best practice to configure the time intervals for
reauthentication, multicast key rotation, and unicast key rotation to be at
least 15 minutes.
Multicast Key
Rotation Time
Interval
(60-86400 sec)
1800
Unicast Key
Rotation Time
Interval
(60-864000 sec)
900
When enabled, unicast and multicast keys are updated after each
reauthorization. It is a best practice to configure the time intervals for
reauthentication, multicast key rotation, and unicast key rotation to be at
least 15 minutes. Make sure these intervals are mutually prime, and the
factor of the unicast key rotation interval and the multicast key rotation
interval is less than the reauthentication interval.
Authentication
Server Retry
Interval
(5-65535 sec)
30
Specify the interface at which reauthentication is supported. The
supported range is from 1 to 6,535 seconds.
Authentication
Server Retry Count
(0-3)
2
Define the number of times that failed authentication should be allowed to
retry authentication.
Framed MTU
(500-1500)
1100
Define the size, in bytes, for framed maximum transmission units.
Number of Times
ID-Requests are
Retried (1-10)
3
Define the number of allowable times that failed ID requests are allowed to
retry the request.
Maximum Number
of Reauthentication
Attempts (1-10)
3
Set the number of times that reauthentication is to be attempted if the first
authentication attempt fails.
66 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 17 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Maximum Number
of Times Held State
Can Be Bypassed
(0-3)
0
Define whether a held state can be bypassed, and the number of times this
is to be allowed.
Dynamic WEP Key
Message Retry
Count (1-3)
1
Define the number of times that failed authentication with a WEP key
should be allowed to retry authentication. The range is from 0 to 3
attempts.
A primary means of cracking WEP keys is to capture 802.11 frames over
an extended period of time and searching for such weak implementations
that are still used by many legacy devices.
Dynamic WEP Key
Size (bits)
128
Specify the maximum size of the WEP key in bits. The options are 40 or
128.
Interval Between
WPA/WPA2 Key
Messages
(10-5000 msec)
1000
Specify the key message interval in milliseconds.
Display Between
EAP-Success and
WPA2 Unicast Key
Exchange
(0-2000 msec)
0
Full field name is Delay between EAP-Success and WPA2 Unicast Key
Exchange.
Define EAP for RADIUS server authentication.
802.1x uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to exchange
messages during the authentication process. The authentication protocols
that operate inside the 802.1x framework that are suitable for wireless
networks include EAP-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS), Protected EAP
(PEAP), and EAP-Tunneled TLS (EAP-TTLS). These protocols allow the
network to authenticate the client while also allowing the client to
authenticate the network.
Delay between
WPA/WPA2 Unicast
Key Exchange
(0-2000 msec)
0
Specify the delay between processing these two key times during
authentication.
WPA/WPA2 Key
Message Retry
Count (1-10)
3
Specify the number of times that WPA or WPA2 keys are allowed to retry.
The supported range is from 1 to 10.
Multicast Key
Rotation
No
Enable or disable multicast key rotation, and define the related settings on
this page for multicast key rotation time and interval if this field is enabled.
Unicast Key
Rotation
No
Enable or disable unicast key rotation, and define the related settings on
this page for unicast key rotation time and interval if t his field is enabled.
Reauthentication
No
Enable or disable reauthentication. Although reauthentication and rekey
timers are configurable on a per-SSID basis, an 802.1x transaction during
a call can affect voice quality. If a client is on a call, 802.1x reauthentication
and rekey are disabled by default until the call is completed. You disable or
re-enable the “voice aware” feature in the 802.1x authentication profile.
Opportunistic Key
Caching
Yes
Enable or disable opportunistic key caching (also configured in the 802.1x
Authentication profile). This supports WPA2 clients.
Validate PMKID
No
Define whether PMKID authentication should be validated.
Use Session Key
No
Specify whether a client session should use a security key.
Use Static Key
No
The IEEE 802.1x authentication standard allows for the use of keys that are
dynamically generated on a per-client basis, or as a static key that is the
same on all devices in the network). Define whether to use a static key with
this setting.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 67
Table 17 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
xSec MTU
(1024 - 1500 Bytes)
1300 bytes
Define the maximum transmission unit size in bytes.
Termination
No
Select this option to terminate 802.1x authentication on the WLAN switch.
Termination EAPType TLS
No
Specify if the EAP termination type is TLS.
Termination EAPType PEAP
0
Specify EAP-PEAP termination.
802.1x authentication based on PEAP with MS-CHAPv2 provides both
computer and user authentication. If a user attempts to log in without the
computer being authenticated first, the user is placed into a more limited
“guest” user role.
Windows domain credentials are used for computer authentication, and
the user’s Windows login and password are used for user authentication. A
single user sign-on facilitates both authentication to the wireless network
and access to the Windows server resources.
Termination Inner
EAP-Type
MSCHAPv2
No
Enable or disable this setting. You can enable caching of user credentials
on the WLAN switch as a backup to an external authentication server. The
EAP-Microsoft Challenge Authentication Protocol version 2 (MS-CHAPv2),
described in RFC 2759, is widely supported by Microsoft clients.
Termination Inner
EAP-Type GTC
No
Enable or disable GTC. EAP-Generic Token Card (GTC): Described in RFC
2284, this EAP method permits the transfer of unencrypted usernames
and passwords from client to server. The main uses for EAP-GTC are onetime token cards such as SecureID and the use of LDAP or RADIUS as the
user authentication server.
You can also enable caching of user credentials on the WLAN switch as a
backup to an external authentication server.
Token Caching
Disabled
Specify whether EAP token caching is enabled or disabled.
Token Caching
Period (1-240 hrs)
24
Specify token caching, in hours. The supported range is from 1 to 240
hours.
CA-Certificate
N/A
Type the CA certificate imported into the WLAN switch.
Server-Certificate
N/A
Specify a server certificate. The list of available certificates is taken from
the computer certificate store on which IAS is running. In this case, a selfsigned certificate was generated by the local certificate authority and
installed on the IAS system. On each wireless client device, the local
certificate authority is added as a trusted certificate authority, thus allowing
this certificate to be trusted.
TLS Guest Access
No
Specify if TLS authentication supports guest users.
User-level authentication is performed by an external RADIUS server using
PPP EAP-TLS. In this scenario, client and server certificates are mutually
authenticated during the EAP-TLS exchange. During the authentication,
the WLAN switch encapsulates EAP-TLS messages from the client into
RADIUS messages and forwards them to the server.
TLS Guest Role
ap-role
Specify the TLS authentication role that will support guests. This setting
requires a policy enforcement firewall license.
68 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 17 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Ignore EAPOLSTART After
Authentication
No
Enable or disable this setting.
EAP authentication starts with a EAPOL-start frame that is sent by the
wireless client to the AP. Upon reception of such a frame, the AP responds
back to the wireless client with an EAP-Identify-Request and also does
internal resource allocation. Attackers can use this vulnerability by sending
a lot of EAPOL-start frames to the Access point, either by spoofing the
MAC address or by emulating wireless clients. This forces the AP to
allocate increasing resource and eventually bringing it down. Enable this
setting to reduce the risk.
Handle EAPOLLogoff
No
Specify whether authentication should manage logoff activity.
Ignore EAP ID
During Negotiation
No
Specify whether EAP should be ignored during authentication.
WPA-FastHandover
No
In the 802.1x Authentication profile, the WPA fast handover feature allows
certain WPA clients to use a pre-authorized PMK, significantly reducing
handover interruption. Check with the manufacturer of your handset to see
if this feature is supported. This feature is disabled by default.
Disable Rekey and
Reauthentication
for Clients on Call
No
Although reauthentication and rekey timers are configurable on a per-SSID
basis, an 802.1x transaction during a call can affect voice quality. If a client
is on a call, 802.1x reauthentication and rekey are disabled by default until
the call is completed. You disable or re-enable the “voice aware” feature in
the 802.1x authentication profile. This setting requires a voice service
license.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited 802.1x Auth profile appears on the AAA Profiles page, and on the
802.1x Auth details page.
Profiles > AP
Display the currently configured AP profiles by navigating to Device Setup > Profiles > AP.
In AOS-W, related configuration parameters are grouped into a profile that you can apply as needed to an
AP group or to individual APs. This section lists each category of AP profiles that you can configure and
apply to an AP group or to an individual AP. Note that some profiles reference other profiles. For example,
a virtual AP profile references SSID and AAA profiles, while an AAA profile can reference an 802.1x
authentication profile and server group.You can apply the following types of profiles to an AP or AP group:
Perform these steps to configure AP profiles.
1. To view and configure AP profiles, click the AP profile heading in the navigation pane.
Figure 37 AP Profiles in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
2. From the navigation pane, you can configure the following profile types. The following AP profiles
configure AP operation parameters, regulatory domain, SNMP information, and more:
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 69





System—Defines administrative options for the WLAN switch, including the IP addresses of the
local, backup, and master WLAN switches, Real-time Locating Systems (RTLS) server values and the
number of consecutive missed heartbeats on a GRE tunnel before an AP reboots traps. Refer to
“Profiles > AP > System” on page 70
Regulatory domain—Defines an AP’s country code and valid channels for both legacy and highthroughput 802.11a and 802.11b/g radios. “Profiles > AP > Regulatory Domain” on page 73.
Wired—Controls whether 802.11 frames are tunneled to the WLAN switch using Generic Routing
Encapsulation (GRE) tunnels, bridged into the local Ethernet LAN (for remote APs), or a configured
for combination of the two (split-mode). This profile also configures the switching mode
characteristics for the port, and sets the port as either trusted or untrusted. “Profiles > AP > AP
Wired” on page 75.
Ethernet Link—Sets the duplex mode and speed of AP’s Ethernet link. The configurable speed is
dependent on the port type, and you can define a separate Ethernet Interface profile for each
Ethernet link. “Profiles > AP > AP Ethernet Link” on page 76.
SNMP—Defines and enables SNMP settings, to include community string and SNMP user profiles.
“Profiles > AP > SNMP” on page 77.
Profiles > AP > System
Using DNS, the remote AP receives multiple IP addresses in response to a host name lookup. Known as the
backup WLAN switch list, remote APs go through this list to associate with a WLAN switch. If the primary
WLAN switch is unavailable or does not respond, the remote AP continues through the list until it finds an
available WLAN switch. This provides redundancy and failover protection.
If the remote AP loses connectivity on the IPSec tunnel to the WLAN switch, the remote AP establishes
connectivity with a backup WLAN switch from the list and automatically reboots. Network connectivity is
lost during this time. You can also configure a remote AP to revert back to the primary WLAN switch when
it becomes available.To complete this scenario, you must also configure the LMS IP address and the backup
LMS IP address.
Perform these steps to configure a System profile.
1. Click Profiles > AP > System in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. This page summarizes the current
profiles of this type.
2. Click the Add button to create a new System profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to
edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 18:
Table 18 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > System Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
N/A
Enter an IP address.
For those APs that need to boot off the local WLAN switch, configure the
LMS IP address to point to the new local WLAN switch.
General Settings
Other Settings
LMS IP
70 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 18 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > System Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Backup LMS IP
N/A
Enter the IP address of the backup LMS WLAN switch.
LMS Preemption
No
The AP fallback feature allows an AP associated with the backup WLAN
switch (backup LMS) to fail back to the primary WLAN switch (primary
LMS) if it becomes available. Enable LMS preemption with this field.
LMS Hold-down
Period (1-3600 sec)
600
Enter the amount of time the remote AP must wait before moving back to
the primary WLAN switch.
Master WLAN
switch IP Address
N/A
Enter the IP address of the master WLAN switch.
LED Operating
Mode
normal
Specify the LED operating mode for AP-12X WLAN switches. Options are
normal and off.
RF Band
g
Indicates the band for mesh operation for multiband radios. Select a or g.
Important: If you create more than one mesh cluster profile for an AP or
AP group, each mesh cluster profile must use the same band.
Double Encrypt
No
The double encryption feature applies only for traffic to and from a wireless
client that is connected to a tunneled SSID. When this feature is enabled,
all traffic (which is already encrypted using Layer-2 encryption) is reencrypted in the IPSec tunnel. When this feature is disabled, the wireless
frame is only encapsulated inside the IPSec tunnel. All other types of data
traffic between the WLAN switch and the AP (wired traffic and traffic from a
split-tunneled SSID) are always encrypted in the IPSec tunnel.
Native VLAN ID
(0-4094)
1
Enter the ID of the native VLAN. The supported range is from 0 to 4094.
SAP MTU
N/A
Specify the Service Access Point (SAP) maximum transmission unit (MTU)
in bytes. The range is 1024 to 1578 bytes.
Bootstrap
Threshold (1-65535)
8
Enter a threshold value from 0 to 65,535.
Adjust the bootstrap threshold to 30 if the network experiences packet
loss. This makes the AP recover more slowly in the event of a failure, but it
will be more tolerant to heartbeat packet loss.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends the default maximum request retries and
bootstrap threshold settings for most mesh networks; however, if you must
keep your mesh network alive, you can modify the settings as described in
this section. The modified settings are not applicable if mesh portals are
directly connected to the WLAN switch.
Request Retry
Interval
10
Enter in seconds the amount of time for retries. The supported range is
from 1 to 65,535 seconds.
Maximum Request
Retries
10
Maximum number of times to retry AP-generated requests. The default is
10 times. If you must modify this setting, Alcatel-Lucent recommends a
value of 10,000. The range is from 1 to 65,535.
Keepalive Interval
(30-65535)
60
Define the keepalive interval in a range of 30 to 65,535 seconds.
Dump Server
N/A
Enter the IP address for the dump server.
Telnet
No
Enables Telnet in this system profile.
SNMP Sys-contact
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Enter an IP address to the value for SNMP sys_ contact, the SNMP system
Sys location.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 71
Table 18 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > System Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
RFprotect Server IP
N/A
Enter the IP address of the RFProtect server.
RFprotect Backup
Server IP
N/A
Enter an IP address.
When an Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch is present in an Alcatel-Lucent
RFprotect system, an Alcatel-Lucent AP that is acting as an RFprotect
sensor can be configured and managed from the WLAN switch. As a
Managed Sensor, the Alcatel-Lucent AP is managed by the WLAN switch
but sends collected security data about the wireless environment to an
RFprotect Server.
Configure
Aeroscout RTLS
Server
No
Enable this option if you wish to support an Aeroscout RTLS server.
Ortonics Walljack
Yes
Specify whether the Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch uses an Ortonics
walljack.
Ortronics® Wi-Jack™ and Wi-Jack Duo™ thin client access points are
centrally configured and managed by the Alcatel-Lucent Networks
wireless WLAN switches to provide a high performance wireless network
that integrates seamlessly into the structured cabling infrastructure. When
enabled, this setting requires an Ortonics Access Point License.
Ortonics LED Off
Time-Out
Yes
Enable the LED time-out function for Ortonics wall jacks when used. When
enabled, this setting requires an Ortonics Access Point License.
Ortonics Low Temp
100
Ortonics High Temp
110
Enter the low and high temperatures in Celsius for Ortonics wall jacks. The
range is from 0C to 255C degrees. When Ortonics is enabled, these
settings require an Ortonics Access Point License.
Configure RTLS
Server
No
Enable this setting for Real-time Locating Systems (RTLS) server values
and the number of consecutive missed heartbeats on a GRE tunnel before
an AP reboots traps.
Remote-AP DHCP
Server VLAN
(1-4094)
N/A
Specify the VLAN to be associated with the remote-AP DHCP server. This
field requires a remote access points license, when used.
Remote-AP DHCP
Server ID
N/A
Specify the IP address of the remote-AP DHCP server.
Remote-AP DHCP
Default Router
N/A
Specify the IP address of the remote-AP DHCP default router. This field
requires a remote AP license. This field requires a remote access points
license, when used.
Remote-AP DHCP
DNS Server
N/A
Enter the IP address or addresses of one or more remote-AP DHCP DNS
servers.
Remote-AP DHCP
Pool Start
N/A
Remote-AP DHCP
Pool End
N/A
Specify the DHCP IP address pool. This configures the pool of IP
addresses from which the remote AP uses to assign IP addresses.
At the Remote-AP-DHCP Pool Start and End fields, enter the first and last
IP addresses of the pool. These fields require a remote access point
license, when used.
Remote-AP DHCP
Pool Netmask
255.255.255.0
Enter the subnet mask. This field requires a remote access points license,
when used.
Remote-AP DHCP
Lease Time
(0-30 days)
0
Specify the amount of time that the IP address of the DHCP server is valid.
The supported range is from 0 to 30 days. A value of 0 disables this
function. This field requires a remote access points license, when used.
72 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 18 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > System Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Heartbeat DSCP
(0-63)
0
This setting defines DSCP for low-speed networks. The supported range is
from 0 to 63. To enable this function, enter a value greater than 0.
Session ACL
none
Select an access control list for user sessions. Options are as follows:
none
 stateful-dot11x
 stateful kerbos
 valid user

Corporate DNS
Domain
N/A
Enter the domain name service (DNS) domain or domains, one per line.
Image URL
N/A
If an AP developers license is active, enter the image URL in a range from
1 to 1024. This setting requires an AP Developer license, when used.
Maintenance Mode
No
You can configure APs to suppress traps and syslog messages related to
those APs. Known as AP maintenance mode, this setting in the AP system
profile is particularly useful when deploying, maintaining, or upgrading the
network. If enabled, APs stop flooding unnecessary traps and syslog
messages to network management systems or network operations centers
during a deployment or scheduled maintenance. The WLAN switch still
generates debug syslog messages if debug logging is enabled. After
completing the network maintenance, disable AP maintenance mode to
ensure all traps and syslog messages are sent. AP maintenance mode is
disabled by default.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited System profile appears on the System profiles list page.
Profiles > AP > Regulatory Domain
This profile type defines an AP’s country code and valid channels for both legacy and high-throughput
802.11a and 802.11b/g radios.
With the implementation of the high-throughput IEEE 802.11n draft standard, 40 MHz channels were added
in addition to the existing 20 MHz channel options. Available 20 MHz and 40 MHz channels are dependent
on the country code entered in the regulatory domain profile.
The following channel configurations are now available in AOS-W:

A 20 MHz channel assignment consists of a single 20 MHz channel assignment. This channel assignment
is valid for 802.11a/b/g and for 802.11n 20 MHz mode of operation.

A 40 MHz channel assignment consists of two 20 MHz channels bonded together (a bonded pair). This
channel assignment is valid for 802.11n 40 MHz mode of operation and is most often utilized on the 5
GHz frequency band. If high-throughput is disabled, a 40 MHz channel assignment can be configured, but
only the primary channel assignment will be utilized. 20 MHz clients can also associate using this
configuration, but only the primary channel will be utilized.
A high-throughput (HT) AP can use a 40 MHz channel pair comprised of two adjacent 20 MHz channels
available in the regulatory domain profile for your country. When ARM is configured for a dual-band AP, it
will dynamically select the primary and secondary channels for these devices. It can, however, continue to
scan all changes in the a+b/g bands to calculate interference and detect rogue APs.
Perform these steps to configure a Regulatory Domain profile.
1. Click Profiles > AP > Regulatory Domain in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. This page summarizes the
current profiles of this type.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Regulatory Domain profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing
profile to edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 19:
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 73
Table 19 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > Regulatory Domain Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that
is separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you
can view basic statistics about device, and define which users have
visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
General Settings
Other Settings
Country Code
Designate the country with the 802.1X regulatory standard relevant to
this WLAN.
Valid 802.11a
40MHz Channel
pairs
N/A
Select a 40MHz channel pair for 802.11a.
A high-throughput (HT) AP can use a 40 MHz channel pair comprised of
two adjacent 20 MHz channels available in the regulatory domain profile
for your country. When ARM is configured for a dual-band AP, it will
dynamically select the primary and secondary channels for these
devices. It can, however, continue to scan all changes in the a+b/g
bands to calculate interference and detect rogue APs.
Valid 802.11g 40
MHz Channel Pairs
N/A
Select a 40MHz channel pair for 802.11ag
A high-throughput (HT) AP can use a 40 MHz channel pair comprised of
two adjacent 20 MHz channels available in the regulatory domain profile
for your country. When ARM is configured for a dual-band AP, it will
dynamically select the primary and secondary channels for these
devices. It can, however, continue to scan all changes in the a+b/g
bands to calculate interference and detect rogue APs.
Valid 802.11a
40MHz Channels
N/A
Specify the valid channels for 40MHz channel pairing in 802.11a.
Valid 802.11g 40
MHz Channels
N/A
Specify the valid channels for 40MHz channel pairing in 802.11g.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Regulatory Domain profile appears on the Regulatory Domain
Profiles page.
74 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > AP > AP Wired
The wired AP profile controls the configuration of the Ethernet port(s) on your AP. You can use the wired
AP profile to configure Ethernet ports for bridging or secure jack operation using the wired AP profile.
Perform these steps to configure a Wired AP profile.
1. Click Profiles > AP > Wired in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. This page summarizes the current
profiles of this type.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Wired profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to
edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 20:
Table 20 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > Wired Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters
that is separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using
folders, you can view basic statistics about device, and define which
users have visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Wired AP Enable
No
Designate whether Wired APs are to be enabled or disabled.
Forward Mode
tunnel
If Wired AP is enabled, designate whether forwarding is to be bridgebased or tunnel-based.
Switchport Mode
Access
Select access or trunk. These options only apply to bridge mode
configurations.
 Access mode forwards untagged packets received on the port to
the WLAN switch and they appear on the configured access mode
VLAN. Tagged packets are dropped. All packets received from the
WLAN switch and sent via this port are untagged. Define the
access mode VLAN in the Access mode VLAN field.
 Trunk mode contains a list of allowed VLANs. Any packet
received on the port that is tagged with an allowed VLAN is
forwarded to the WLAN switch. Untagged packets are forwarded
to the WLAN switch on the configured Native VLAN. Packets
received from the WLAN switch and sent out the port remain
tagged unless the tag value in the packet is the Native VLAN, in
which case the tag is removed. Define the Native VLAN in the
Trunk mode native VLAN field and the other allowed VLANs in the
Trunk mode allowed VLANs field.
Access Mode VLAN
(1-4096)
1
Access mode forwards untagged packets received on the port to the
WLAN switch and they appear on the configured access mode VLAN.
Tagged packets are dropped. All packets received from the WLAN
switch and sent via this port are untagged. Define the access mode
VLAN in the Access mode VLAN field. The VLAN range is from 1 to
4096.
General Settings
Other Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 75
Table 20 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > Wired Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Trunk Mode Native
VLAN (1-4096)
1
Trunk mode contains a list of allowed VLANs. Any packet received on
the port that is tagged with an allowed VLAN is forwarded to the
WLAN switch. Untagged packets are forwarded to the WLAN switch
on the configured Native VLAN. Packets received from the WLAN
switch and sent out the port remain tagged unless the tag value in the
packet is the Native VLAN, in which case the tag is removed. Define
the Native VLAN in the Trunk mode native VLAN field and the other
allowed VLANs in the Trunk mode allowed VLANs field.
Define whether the trunk mode settings defined in additional fields of
this profile are to allow VLANs. The VLAN range is from 1 to 4094.
Enter a list or a range of numbers. The VLAN range is from 1 to 4096.
You can enter a range of numbers, specific numbers or a combination
of range and specific VLAN numbers, as desired.
Trunk Mode
Allowed VLANs
Trusted
No
Use this option if the wired port is a trusted port.
Broadcast
Yes
Use this option if the wired port is a broadcast port.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited 802.1x Auth profile appears on the AAA Profiles page, and on the
802.1x Auth details page.
Profiles > AP > AP Ethernet Link
The configurable speed defined in this profile is dependent on the port type, and you can define a separate
Ethernet Interface profile for each Ethernet link.
Perform these steps to configure a Ethernet Link profile.
1. Click Profiles > AP > Ethernet Link in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new System profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to
edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 21:
Table 21 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > Ethernet Link Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Speed (Mbps)
auto
Designates the speed of the Ethernet link for this profile. Options are 10, 100,
or 1000 Mbits.
Duplex
auto
Defines this profile to support duplex Ethernet. Options are full, half, or auto.
General Settings
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Ethernet Link profile appears on the AAA Profiles page, and on
the 802.1x Auth details page.
76 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > AP > SNMP
OmniAccess WLAN switches and APs support versions 1, 2c, and 3 of Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) for reporting purposes only. In other words, SNMP cannot be used for setting values in an
Alcatel-Lucent system in the current AOS-W version. Perform these steps to configure a SNMP profile.
1. Click Profiles > AP > SNMP in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new SNMP profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to
edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 22:
Table 22 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > SNMP Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Yes
Enable or disable SNMP in this profile.
General Settings
Other Settings
SNMP Enable
Enter Community
String
Text field allows you to type one or multiple SNMP community strings
applied to this profile.
Select SNMP User Profile
Select SNMP User
Profile
If SNMP is enabled in this profile, and one or more profiles have been
configured, select the corresponding SNMP profile from this list.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited SNMP profile appears on the SNMP profiles page.
Profiles > AP > SNMP > SNMP User
Perform these steps to configure a SNMP profile.
1. Click Profiles > AP > SNMP > SNMP User in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new SNMP user, or click the pencil icon next to an existing user to edit
that user. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 22:
Table 23 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > SNMP > SNMP User Settings
Field
Default
Description
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that
is separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you
can view basic statistics about device, and define which users have
visibility to which device parameters.
General Settings
Folder
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 77
Table 23 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > SNMP > SNMP User Settings
Field
Default
Description
Name
Blank
Name of the SNMP user profile. This is the name by which the SNMP
user is managed and accessed when cited by SNMP profiles
User Name
Blank
Actual name of the network user to be supported by this SNMP profile in
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Authentication
Profile
none
Other Settings
Select a protocol from the drop-down menu. Options are as follows:
none—Uses no authentication type for the user being defined.
 md5—Sets the MD5 hashing algorithm for the user that hashes a
cleartext password.
 sha—Sets the SHA hashing algorithm for the user that hashes a
cleartext password.

3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited SNMP user appears on the SNMP User page. This user can now
be referenced in SNMP profiles.
Refer to the following topics for additional information about SNMP profiles:

“Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch Traps” on page 78

“Access Point/Air Monitor Traps” on page 79
Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch Traps
Table 24 provides a list of key traps generated by the Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch.
Table 24 Key SNMP Traps of the Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch
Trap
Description
Priority Level
WLAN switch IP changed
This indicates the WLAN switch IP has been changed. The WLAN switch IP is either
the loopback IP address or the IP address of the VLAN 1 interface (if no loopback IP
address is configured).
Critical
WLAN switch role changed This indicates that the WLAN switch has transitioned from being a master WLAN
switch to a local WLAN switch or vice versa.
Critical
User entry created/
deleted/authenticated/deauthenticated/
authentication failed.
Each of these traps are triggered by an event related to a user event. The event can be
a new user entry being created in the user table, deletion of a user entry, a user getting
authenticated successfully, a user getting de-authenticated, or a failed authentication
attempt. Each of these traps will be generated by the WLAN switch on which the user
event occurs. In other words this is a local event to the WLAN switch where the user is
visible.
Medium
Authentication server
request timed out.
This trap indicates that a request to a authentication server did not receive a response
from the server within a specified amount of time and therefore the request timed out.
This usually indicates a connectivity problem from the Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch to
the authentication server or some other problem related to the authentication server.
High
Authentication server
timed out
N O T E: Earlier versions of AOS-W supported SNMP on individual APs. This feature is
not supported by this version of AOS-W. This trap indicates that an authentication
server has been taken out of service. This is almost always same as
AuthServerReqTimedOut except when there is only one authentication server in
which case the server will never be taken out of service. In that case the
AuthServerReqTimedOut will continue to be raised but not then
AuthServerTimedOut.
High
78 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 24 Key SNMP Traps of the Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch (Continued)
Trap
Description
Priority Level
Authentication server up
This trap indicates that an authentication server that was previously not responding
has started responding to authentication requests. This will be triggered by a user
event that causes the WLAN switch to send an authentication request to the
authentication server.
Low.
Authentication user table
full
This trap indicates that the authentication user table has reached its limit with the
number of user entries it can hold. This event is local to the WLAN switch that
generates the traps. The maximum number of user entries that can be present at the
same time in the user table is 4096.
Critical
Authentication Bandwidth
contracts table full
This trap indicates that the maximum number of configured bandwidth contracts on
the WLAN switch has been exceeded. The threshold for this is 4096
High
Authentication ACL table
full
This trap indicates that the maximum number of ACL entries in the ACL table has
been exceeded. The limit for this is 2048 entries on a WLAN switch.
High
Power supply failure
As the name indicates, this trap indicates the failure of one of the two possible power
supplies in the WLAN switch.
Critical
Fan failure
As the name indicates, this trap indicates a failure of the fan in the WLAN switch.
Critical
Out of Range Voltage
This trap indicates an out of range voltage being supplied to the WLAN switch.
Critical
Out of Range temperature
This trap indicates an out of range operating temperature being supplied to the WLAN
switch.
Critical
Line card inserted/
removed
These traps indicate that a Line Card has been inserted or removed from the WLAN
switch.
Critical.
Supervisor card inserted/
removed
These traps indicate that a Supervisor card has been inserted or removed from the
WLAN switch
Critical
Power supply missing
This trap indicates that one of the power supplies is missing.
Critical
Access Point/Air Monitor Traps
Table 25 describes the key traps that can be generated by an Alcatel-Lucent access point or an air monitor:
Table 25 Key SNMP Traps from Alcatel-Lucent Access Points or Air Monitors
Trap
Description
Priority
Unsecure AP Detected
This trap indicates that an air monitor has detected and classified an access point
as unsecure. It will indicate the location of the air monitor that has detected the
unsecure AP, the channel on which the AP was detected as well as the BSSID and
SSID of the detected AP.
Critical
Station impersonation
This trap indicates an air monitor has detected a station impersonation event. The
trap will provide the location of the air monitor that has detected the event and the
MAC address of the station.
Critical
Reserved channel impersonation
This trap indicates an access point is being detected is violating the reserved
channels. The location of the AP/AM that detects the event is provided in the trap.
In addition to this, the BSSID and SSID of the detected AP is also included.
High
Valid SSID violation
This indicates a configuration in the configuration of the SSID of the AP. The AP
generates the trap and includes its BSSID, the configured SSID and the location of
the AP in the trap.
High
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 79
Table 25 Key SNMP Traps from Alcatel-Lucent Access Points or Air Monitors (Continued)
Trap
Description
Priority
Channel misconfiguration
This trap indicates an error in channel configuration of an AP. The AP generates the
trap and includes its BSSID, the configured SSID and the location of the AP in the
trap
High
OUI misconfiguration
This trap indicates an error in the OUI configuration of an Access Point. The AP
generates the trap and includes its BSSID, the configured SSID and the location of
the AP in the trap
High
SSID misconfiguration
This trap indicates an error in the SSID configuration of an Access Point. The AP
generates the trap and includes its BSSID, the configured SSID and the location of
the AP in the trap
High
Short Preamble misconfiguration
This trap indicates an error in the Short Preamble configuration of an AP. The AP
generates the trap and includes its BSSID, the configured SSID and the location of
the AP in the trap. This check will be done only if the short-preamble option is
selected for the AP from the CLI or the WebUI. For a complete list of traps, refer to
the Alcatel-Lucent MIB Reference.
High
AM misconfiguration
This trap indicates an error in the Short Preamble configuration of an AP. The AP
generates the trap and includes its BSSID, the configured SSID and the location of
the AP in the trap
High
Repeat WEP-IV violation
This trap indicates that the AM has detected a valid station or a valid AP sending
consecutive frames that has the same IV (initialization vector). This usually means
that entity has a “flawed” WEP implementation and is therefore a potential security
risk.
High
Weak WEP-IV violation
This trap indicates that the AM has detected a valid station or a valid AP sending
frames with an IV that is in the range of IV that are known to be cryptographically
weak and therefore are a potential security risk.
High
Adhoc networks detected
This trap indicates that the AM has detected Adhoc networks
High
Valid station policy violation
This trap indicates that a valid station policy is being violated.
High
AP interference
This trap indicates that the indicated AM (identified by the BSSID/ SSID) is
detecting AP interference on the indicated channel.
Medium
Frame Retry rate exceeded
This trap refers to the event when the percentage of received and transmitted
frames with the retry bit crosses the High watermark. This event can be triggered for
an AP, a station or a channel. The two values that should be configured related to
this event are Frame Retry Rate – High Watermark and Frame Retry Rate –Low
watermark. The High Watermark refers to the percentage threshold which if
surpassed triggers the event that causes the trap to be sent. The Low Watermark
refers to the percentage threshold such that if the retry rate reaches a value lower
than this value the event is reset. What this means is that the trap will be triggered
the first time the Frame Retry rate crosses the High Watermark and then will only be
triggered if the Frame Retry Rate goes under the Low Watermark and then crosses
the High Watermark again. This holds true for all the thresholds explained below as
well.
Medium
Frame Bandwidth rate exceeded
This trap refers to the event of the bandwidth rate for a station exceeding a
configured threshold (High watermark). The terms High Watermark and Low
Watermark hold the same meaning as explained above.
Medium
Frame low speed rate exceeded
This trap refers to the event when the percentage of received and transmitted
frames at low speed (less that 5.5Mbps for 802.11b and less that 24 Mbps for
802.11a) exceeds the configured High Watermark. The terms High Watermark and
Low Watermark hold the same meaning as explained above.
Medium
80 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > IDS
The IDS profiles configure the AP’s Intrusion Detection System features, which detect and disable rogue
APs and other devices that can potentially disrupt network operations. An AP is considered to be a rogue
AP if it is both unauthorized and plugged into the wired side of the network. An AP is considered to be an
interfering AP if it is seen in the RF environment but is not connected to the wired network.
The top-level IDS profile, assigned to an Alcatel-Lucent AP group or AP name, references additional IDS
profiles that are also described in this section. AOS-W includes predefined top-level IDS profiles that
provide different levels of sensitivity. The following are predefined IDS profiles:

ids-disabled

ids-high-setting

ids-low-setting

ids-medium-setting (the default setting)
You apply the top-level IDS profile to an AP group or specific AP.
To view IDS profiles, click Profiles > IDS in the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane.
Figure 38 IDS Profiles in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
NOTE
A predefined IDS profile refers to specific instances of the other IDS profiles. You cannot create new instances of a
profile within a predefined IDS profile. You can modify parameters within the other IDS profiles.
IDS profiles reference other profiles. These additional profiles can be created before, during, or after the
configuration of the IDS profile.
Click the Add button to create a new IDS profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to edit
that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 27:
Table 26 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > General Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated.
The drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the
profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
General Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 81
Table 26 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > General Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Other Settings and AP SNMP User Profiles
IDS
Unauthorized
Device Profile
default
Select the IDS Unauthorized Device Profile from the drop-down menu. This
profile is referenced by the overriding IDS profile currently being configured.
The drop-down menu contains any profiles that you have configured.
To create a new profile of this type, click the add icon. To edit an existing
profile, select that profile then click the pencil icon.
For additional information about configuring IDS Unauthorized Device Profiles,
refer to “Profiles > IDS > Unauthorized Device” on page 91.
IDS Signature
Matching Profile
default
Select the IDS Signature Matching Profile from the drop-down menu. The
drop-down menu lists all signature matching profiles that are currently
configured and available.
To create a new profile of this type, click the add icon. To edit an existing
profile, select that profile then click the pencil icon.
For additional information about configuring IDS Unauthorized Device Profiles,
refer to “Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching” on page 84.
IDS General
Profile
default
Select the IDS General Profile from the drop-down menu. The drop-down
menu lists all General IDS profiles that are currently configured and available.
To create a new profile of this type, click the add icon. To edit an existing
profile, select that profile then click the pencil icon.
For additional information about configuring IDS Unauthorized Device Profiles,
refer to “Profiles > IDS > General” on page 83.
IDS
Impersonation
Profile
default
Select the IDS Impersonation Profile from the drop-down menu. The dropdown menu lists all such profiles that are currently configured and available.
To create a new profile of this type, click the add icon. To edit an existing
profile, select that profile then click the pencil icon.
For additional information about configuring IDS Impersonation Profiles, refer
to “Profiles > IDS > Impersonation” on page 90.
IDS DoS Profile
default
Select the IDS Impersonation Profile from the drop-down menu. The dropdown menu lists all such profiles that are currently configured and available.
To create a new profile of this type, click the add icon. To edit an existing
profile, select that profile then click the pencil icon.
For additional information about configuring IDS Impersonation Profiles, refer
to “Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service” on page 85.
4. Select the profile type to view or configure:

General—Configures general AP attributes. Refer to “Profiles > IDS > General” on page 83.

Signature Matching—Configures signatures and signature matching for intrusion detection. Refer to
“Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching” on page 84.


Signature—Defines a predefined signature. Refer to “Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching >
Signatures” on page 85.
Denial of Service—Configures traffic anomaly settings for Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. Refer to
“Profiles > IDS > Impersonation” on page 90.

Rate Thresholds—Defines thresholds assigned to the different frame types for rate anomaly
checking. Refer to “Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service > Rate Threshold” on page 88.

Impersonation—Configures anomaly settings for impersonation attacks. Refer to “Profiles > IDS >
Impersonation” on page 90.

Unauthorized Device—Configures detection for unauthorized devices. Also configures rogue AP
detection and containment. Refer to “Profiles > IDS > Unauthorized Device” on page 91.
5. Click Add or Save. The added or edited IDS profile appears on the IDS profiles page.
82 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > IDS > General
Perform these steps to configure a General IDS profile.
1. Click Profiles > IDS > General in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. The list of current IDS profiles
appears on this page.
2. Click the Add button to create a new General profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to
edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 27:
Table 27 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > General Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that
is separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you
can view basic statistics about device, and define which users have
visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
General Settings
Other Settings and AP SNMP User Profiles
Stats Update
Interval
(60-36000 sec)
60
Time interval, in seconds, for the AP to update the WLAN switch with
statistics.
NOTE: This setting takes effect only if the Alcatel-Lucent Mobility
Manager
is configured. Otherwise, statistics update to the WLAN switch is
disabled.
AP Inactivity
Timeout
(5-36000 sec)
5
Set the time, in seconds, after which an AP is aged out.
STA Inactivity
Timeout
(30-36000 sec)
60
Set the time, in seconds, after which a STA is aged out.
Min Potential AP
Beacon Rate
(0-100%)
25
Set the minimum beacon rate acceptable from a potential AP, in
percentage of the advertised beacon interval.
Min Potential AP
Monitor Time
(0-36000 sec)
2
Set the minimum time, in seconds, a potential AP has to be up before it
is classified as a real AP.
Signature Quiet Time
(60-360000 sec)
900
Set the time to wait, in seconds, after which the check can be resumed
when detecting a signature match.
Wireless
Containment
Yes
Enable or disable containment from the wireless side.
Debug Wireless
Containment
No
Enable or disable debugging of containment from the wireless side.
Enabling this debug option causes containment to function improperly.
Wired Containment
No
Enable or disable containment from the wireless side.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 83
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited General profile appears on the IDS > General profiles page.
Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching
The IDS signature matching profile contains signatures for intrusion detection. This profile can include
predefined or custom signatures. Table 28 describes the predefined signatures that you can add to the profile.
Perform these steps to configure a Signature Matching profile.
1. Click Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Signature Matching profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing
profile to edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
Table 28 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that
is separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you
can view basic statistics about device, and define which users have
visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
N/A
Select from signature options as follows:
 AirJack
 ASLEAP
 Deauth-Broadcast
 Default
 Netstumbler Generic
 Netstrumbler Version 3.3.0x
 Null-Probe-Response
General Settings
Signature Profiles
Select Signature
Profiles
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Signature Matching profile appears on the IDS > Signature
Matching profiles page.
84 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching > Signatures
Perform these steps to create signatures for use with Signature Matching profiles.
1. Click Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching > Signature in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Signature, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to edit
that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 29:
Table 29 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Signature Creation Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the signature.
General Settings
Add
Click this button to add a new IDS signature. Complete the settings as
follows:
 Parameter, which can be one of the following:






bssid
dst-mac
frame-type
payload
seq-num
src-mac
BSSID
Click Add when these signature settings are defined.

3. Click Add on the Signature page. The added or edited Signature appears on the IDS > Signature Matching
> Signatures page.
Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service
This profile type defines traffic anomaly settings that detect and process denial-of-service attacks. This
profile type defines the parameters that are monitored and acted upon when detecting and blacklisting an
offending client from the Alcatel-Lucent system. When a client is blacklisted in the Alcatel-Lucent system,
the client is not allowed to associate with any AP in the network for a specified amount of time. If a client is
connected to the network when it is blacklisted, a de-authentication message is sent to force the client to
disconnect. While blacklisted, the client cannot associate with another SSID in the network.
Table 30 summarizes the predefined IDS Denial of Service profiles. These profiles are viewable with the
Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service path in the navigation pane.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 85
Table 30 Predefined IDS DoS Profiles
Parameter
ids-dosdisabled
ids-dos-lowsetting ids-dosmedium-setting
ids-dos-highsetting
Detect Disconnect Station
Attack
disabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
Disconnect STA Detection
Quiet Time
900 seconds
900 seconds
900 seconds
900 seconds
Spoofed Deauth Blacklist
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
Detect AP Flood Attack
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
AP Flood Threshold
50
50
50
50
AP Flood Increase Time
3 seconds
3 seconds
3 seconds
3 seconds
AP Flood Detection Quiet
Time
900 seconds
900 seconds
900 seconds
900 seconds
Detect EAP Rate Anomaly
disabled
disabled
enabled
enabled
EAP Rate Threshold
60
60
30
60
EAP Rate Time Interval
3 seconds
3 seconds
3 seconds
3 seconds
EAP Rate Quiet Time
900 seconds
900 seconds
900 seconds
900 seconds
Detect Rate Anomalies
disabled
disabled
disabled
enabled
Detect 802.11n 40 MHz
Intolerance Setting
disabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
Client 40 MHz Intolerance
Detection Quiet Time
900 seconds
900 seconds
900 seconds
900 seconds
Rate Thresholds for Assoc
Frames
default
default
default
default
Rate Thresholds for
Disassoc Frames
default
default
default
default
Rate Thresholds for
Deauth Frames
default
default
default
default
Rate Thresholds for Probe
Request Frames
default
probe-requestresponse-thresholds
probe-request-responsethresholds
probe-requestresponse-thresholds
Rate Thresholds for Probe
Response Frames
default proberequest-responsethresholds
probe-requestresponse-thresholds
probe-request-responsethresholds
Rate Thresholds for Auth
Frames
default
default
default
default
Perform these steps to configure or edit an IDS Denial of Service profile, and to create or edit profiles that
are referenced by a DOC profile.
1. Click Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Signature Matching profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing
profile to edit that profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 31:
86 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 31 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Rate Thresholds for
Assoc Frames
default
Select a profile from the drop-down menu, or click the edit (icon) or add
(icon) to edit or create a profile that sets the rate threshold for association
frames. The IDS rate threshold profile defines thresholds assigned to the
different frame types for rate anomaly checking.
Rate Thresholds for
Disassoc Frames
default
Select a profile from the drop-down menu, or click the edit (icon) or add
(icon) to edit or create a profile that sets the rate threshold for
disassociation frames. The IDS rate threshold profile defines thresholds
assigned to the different frame types for rate anomaly checking.
Rate Thresholds for
Deauth Frames
default
Select a profile from the drop-down menu, or click the edit (icon) or add
(icon) to edit or create a profile that sets the rate threshold for deauthentication frames. The IDS rate threshold profile defines thresholds
assigned to the different frame types for rate anomaly checking.
Rate Thresholds for
Probe Request
Frames
default
Select a profile from the drop-down menu, or click the edit (icon) or add
(icon) to edit or create a profile that sets the rate threshold for probe
request frames. The IDS rate threshold profile defines thresholds assigned
to the different frame types for rate anomaly checking.
Rate Thresholds for
Probe Response
Frames
default
Select a profile from the drop-down menu, or click the edit (icon) or add
(icon) to edit or create a profile that sets the rate threshold for probe
response frames. The IDS rate threshold profile defines thresholds
assigned to the different frame types for rate anomaly checking.
Rate Thresholds for
Auth Frames
default
Select a profile from the drop-down menu, or click the edit (icon) or add
(icon) to edit or create a profile that sets the rate threshold for
authentication frames. The IDS rate threshold profile defines thresholds
assigned to the different frame types for rate anomaly checking.
Detect Disconnect
Station Attack
Yes
Enables or disables detection of station disconnection attacks.
Disconnect STA
Detection Quiet
Time
900
After a station disconnection attack is detected, sets the time (in seconds)
that must elapse before another identical alarm can be generated.
Spoofed Deauth
Blacklist
No
Enables or disables automatic client blacklisting of spoofed deauthentication.
Detect AP Flood
Attack
No
Enables or disables the detection of flooding with fake AP beacons to
confuse legitimate users and to increase the amount of processing need
on client operating systems.
AP Flood Threshold
50
Sets the number of Fake AP beacons that must be received within the
Flood Increase Time to trigger an alarm.
General Settings
Referenced Profiles
Other Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 87
Table 31 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
AP Flood Increase
Time
3
Sets the time, in seconds, during which a configured number of Fake AP
beacons must be received to trigger an alarm.
AP Flood Detection
Quiet Time
900
After an alarm has been triggered by a Fake AP flood, the time (in seconds)
that must elapse before an identical alarm may be triggered.
Detect EAP Rate
Anomaly
No
Enables or disables Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) handshake
analysis to detect an abnormal number of authentication procedures on a
channel and generates an alarm when this condition is detected.
EAP Rate
Thresholds
60
Sets the number of EAP handshakes that must be received within the EAP
Rate Time Interval to trigger an alarm.
EAP Rate Time
Interval
3
Sets the time, in seconds, during which the configured number of EAP
handshakes must be received to trigger an alarm.
EAP Rate Quiet
Time
900
After an alarm has been triggered, sets the time (in seconds) that must
elapse before another identical alarm may be triggered.
Detect Rate
Anomalies
No
Enables or disables detection of rate anomalies.
Detect 802.11n
40MHz Intolerance
Setting
Yes
Enables or disables detection of 802.11n 40 MHz intolerance setting,
which controls whether stations and APs advertising 40 MHz intolerance
will be reported.
Client 40 MHz
Intolerance
Detection Quiet
Time
900
Controls the quiet time (when to stop reporting intolerant STAs if they have
not been detected), in seconds, for detection of 802.11n 40 MHz
intolerance setting.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Denial of Service profile appears on the IDS > Denial of Service
profiles page.
Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service > Rate Threshold
The IDS rate threshold profile defines thresholds assigned to the different frame types for rate anomaly
checking. A profile of this type is attached to each of the following 802.11 frame types in the IDS Denial of
Service profile:

Association frames

Disassociation frames

Deauthentication frames

Probe Request frames

Probe Response frames

Authentication frames
A channel threshold applies to an entire channel, while a node threshold applies to a particular client MAC
address. Alcatel-Lucent provides predefined default IDS rate thresholds profiles for each of these types of
frames. Default values depend upon the frame type.
Perform these steps to create Rate Threshold Profiles for use with Denial of Service profiles.
1. Click Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service > Rate Thresholds in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. This page
summarizes the current thresholds available.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Rate Threshold, or click the pencil icon next to an existing
threshold to edit. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 32:
88 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 32 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service, Rate Threshold Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the rate threshold profile.
Channel Increase
Time (0--360000 sec)
15
Set the time, in seconds, in which the threshold must be exceeded in order
to trigger an alarm.
Channel Quiet Time
(60-360000 sec)
900
Set the time that must elapse before another identical alarm may be
triggered, after an alarm has been triggered, Use this option to prevent
excessive messages in the log file.
Channel Threshold
(0-100000)
300
Specify the number of a specific type of frame. This number must be
exceeded within a specific interval in an entire channel to trigger an alarm.
Node Time Interval
(1-120 sec)
15
Set the time, in seconds, in which the threshold must be exceeded in order
to trigger an alarm.
Node Quiet Time
(60-360000 sec)
900
Set the time that must elapse before another identical alarm may be
triggered, after an alarm has been triggered. This option prevents excessive
messages in the log file.
Node Threshold
(0-100000)
200
Specify the number of a specific type of frame that must be exceeded within
a specific interval for a particular client MAC address to trigger an alarm.
General Settings
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Rate Threshold appears on the Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service >
Rate Thresholds page.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 89
Profiles > IDS > Impersonation
Perform these steps to create IDS Impersonation profiles.
1. Click Profiles > IDS > Impersonation in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Impersonation profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing
profile to edit. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 33:
Table 33 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Impersonation Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the impersonation profile.
Detect AP
Impersonation
Yes
Enable or disable detection of AP impersonation. In AP impersonation
attacks, the attacker sets up an AP that assumes the BSSID and ESSID of
a valid AP. AP impersonation attacks can be done for man-in-the-middle
attacks, a rogue AP attempting to bypass detection, or a honeypot attack.
Protect from AP
Impersonation
No
When AP impersonation is detected, use this control to set both the
legitimate and impersonating AP to be disabled using a denial of service
attack.
Beacon Diff
Threshold (0-100%)
50
Set the percentage increase in beacon rate that triggers an AP
impersonation event.
Beacon Increase
Wait Time
(0-360000 sec)
3
Set the time, in seconds, after the Beacon Diff Threshold is crossed before
an AP impersonation event is generated.
Detect Sequence
Anomaly
No
Enable or disable detection of anomalies between sequence numbers
seen in 802.11 frames. During an impersonation attack, the attacker may
spoof the MAC address of a client or AP — if two devices are active on the
network with the same MAC address, the sequence numbers in the frames
will not match since the sequence number is generated by NIC firmware.
Sequence Number
of Difference
(0-100000)
300
Set the maximum allowable tolerance between sequence numbers within
the Sequence Number Time Tolerance period.
Sequence Number
Time Tolerance
(0-360000 sec)
300
Time, in seconds, during which sequence numbers must exceed the
Sequence Number Difference value for an alarm to be triggered.
Sequence Number
Quiet Time
(60-360000 sec)
900
After an alarm has been triggered, the time (in seconds) that must elapse
before another identical alarm may be triggered.
General Settings
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Impersonation profile appears on the Profiles > IDS >
Impersonation page.
90 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > IDS > Unauthorized Device
Unauthorized device detection includes the ability to detect and disable rogue APs and other devices that
can potentially disrupt network operations.
The most important IDS functionality offered in the Alcatel-Lucent system is the ability to classify an AP as
either a rogue AP or an interfering AP. An AP is considered to be a rogue AP if it is both unauthorized and
plugged into the wired side of the network. An AP is considered to be an interfering AP if it is seen in the RF
environment but is not connected to the wired network. While the interfering AP can potentially cause RF
interference, it is not considered a direct security threat since it is not connected to the wired network.
However, an interfering AP may be reclassified as a rogue AP.
NOTE
Rogue device classification for Alcatel-Lucent WMS Offload infrastructure is also described in the OV3600 User
Guide, Version 6.3.
You can enable a policy to automatically disable APs that are classified as a rogue APs by the Alcatel-Lucent
system. When a rogue AP is disabled, no wireless stations are allowed to associate to that AP.
Perform these steps to create IDS Unauthorized Device profiles.
1. Click Profiles > IDS > Unauthorized Devices in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Unauthorized Devices profile, or click the pencil icon next to an
existing profile to edit. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 34:
Table 34 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Unauthorized Devices Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Detect Adhoc
Networks
Yes
Enable or disable detection of adhoc networks.
Protect from Adhoc
Networks
No
Enable or disable protection from adhoc networks. When adhoc networks
are detected, they are disabled using a denial of service attack.
Detect Windows
Bridge
Yes
Enable or disable detection of Windows station bridging.
Detect Wireless
Bridge
Yes
Enable or disable detection of wireless bridging.
Detect Devices with
An Invalid MAC OUI
No
Enable or disable the checking of the first three bytes of a MAC address,
known as the MAC organizationally unique identifier (OUI), assigned by the
IEEE to known manufacturers. Often clients using a spoofed MAC address
do not use a valid OUI and instead use a randomly generated MAC
address. Enabling MAC OUI checking causes an alarm to be triggered if an
unrecognized MAC address is in use.
General Settings
Other Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 91
Table 34 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Unauthorized Devices Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
MAC OUI Detection
Quiet Time
(60-360000 sec)
900
Set the time, in seconds, that must elapse after an invalid MAC OUI alarm
has been triggered before another identical alarm may be triggered.
Adhoc Network
Detection Quiet Time
(60-360000 sec)
900
Set the time, in seconds, that must elapse after an adhoc network
detection alarm has been triggered before another identical alarm may be
triggered.
Wireless Bridge
Detection Quiet Time
(60-360000 sec)
900
Set the time, in seconds, that must elapse after a wired bridging alarm has
been triggered before another identical alarm may be triggered.
Rogue AP
Classification
Yes
Enable or disable rogue AP classification. A rogue AP is one that is
unauthorized and plugged into the wired side of the network. Any other AP
seen in the RF environment that is not part of the valid enterprise network
is considered to be “interfering” — it has the potential to cause RF
interference but it is not connected to the wired network and thus does not
represent a direct threat.
Overlay Rogue AP
Classification
Yes
Set Overlay Rogue Classification, which is classification through valid/
rogue APs. A WLAN switch uses the wired-mac table of other valid and
rogue APs as equivalents of the wired MACs that it sees on our network.
When this match is triggered, it makes a note of the AP that helped in this
process, and this info will be displayed as the Helper-AP.
Valid Wired MACs
Blank Text
Field
Set a list of MAC addresses of wired devices in the network, typically
gateways or servers.
Rogue Containment
No
By default, rogue APs are only detected but are not automatically disabled.
This option automatically shuts down rogue APs. When this option is
enabled, clients attempting to associate to a rogue AP will be
disconnected from the rogue AP through a denial of service attack.
Allow Well Known
MAC
N/A
Allow devices with known MAC addresses to classify rogues APs.
Depending on your network, configure one or more of the following
options for classifying rogue APs:
 hsrp—Routers configured for HSRP, a Cisco-proprietary redundancy
protocol, with the HSRP MAC OUI 00:00:0c.
 iana—Routers using the IANA MAC OUI 00:00:5e.
 local-mac—Devices with locally administered MAC addresses starting
with 02.
 vmware—Devices with any of the following VMWare OUIs: 00:0c:29,
00:05:69, or 00:50:56
 vmware1—Devices with VMWare OUI 00:0c:29.
 vmware2—Devices with VMWare OUI 00:05:69.
 vmware3—Devices with VMWare OUI 00:50:56.
If you modify an existing configuration, the new configuration overrides the
original configuration. For example, if you configure allow-wellknown-mac hsrp and then configure allow-well-known-mac iana,
the original configuration is lost.
Suspected Rogue
Containment
No
Use this setting to treat suspected rogue APs as interfering APs; thereby
the WLAN switch attempts to reclassify them as rogue APs. By default,
suspected rogue APs are not automatically contained.
In combination with the suspected rogue containment confidence level,
this option automatically shuts down suspected rogue APs. When this
option is enabled, clients attempting to associate to a suspected rogue AP
will be disconnected from the suspected rogue AP through a denial of
service attack.
92 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 34 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Unauthorized Devices Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Suspected Rogue
Containment
Confidence Level
(50-100)
60
Set the confidence level. When an AP is classified as a suspected rogue
AP, it is assigned a 50% confidence level. If multiple APs trigger the same
events that classify the AP as a suspected rogue, the confidence level
increases by 5% up to 95%.
In combination with suspected rogue containment, this option configures
the threshold by which containment should occur. Suspected rogue
containment occurs only when the configured confidence level is met.
Protect Valid
Stations
No
Use this setting to disallow valid stations from connecting to a non-valid
AP.
Detect Bad WEP
No
Enable or disable detection of WEP initialization vectors that are known to
be weak. A primary means of cracking WEP keys is to capture 802.11
frames over an extended period of time and searching for such weak
implementations that are still used by many legacy devices.
Detect
Misconfigured AP
No
Enable or disable detection of misconfigured APs. An AP is classified as
misconfigured if it does not meet any of the following configurable
parameters:
 Valid channels
 Encryption type
 Short preamble
 List of valid AP MAC OUIs
 Valid SSID list
Protect
Misconfigured AP
No
Enable or disable protection of misconfigured APs.
Protect SSID
No
Enable or disable use of SSID by only valid APs.
Privacy
No
Enable or disable encryption as valid AP configuration.
Require WPA
No
Enable or disable “misconfigured” flagging of any valid AP that is not using
WPA encryption.
Valid 802.11g
Channel for Policy
Enforcement
N/A
Enter the list of valid 802.11g channels that third-party APs are allowed to
use.
Valid 802.11a
Channel for Policy
Enforcement
N/A
Enter the list of valid 802.11a channels that third-party APs are allowed to
use.
Valid MAC OUIs
N/A
Enter the list of MAC OUIs of wired devices in the network, typically
gateways or servers.
Valid and Protected
SSIDs
N/A
Enter the list of valid and protected SSIDs.
Protect 802.11n High
Throughput Devices
No
Enable or disable protection of high-throughput 802.11n devices not
operating in 40 MHz mode.
Protect 40MHz
802.11n High
Throughput Devices
No
Enable or disable protection of high-throughput (802.11n) devices
operating in 40 MHz mode.
Detect Active 802.11
Greenfield Mode
Yes
Enable or disable detection of high-throughput devices advertising
greenfield preamble capability.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Unauthorized Devices profile appears on the Profiles > IDS >
Unauthorized Devices page.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 93
Profiles > Mesh
Mesh profiles help define and bring-up the mesh network. This section describes the mesh radio and mesh
cluster profiles in more detail.

Radio—Alcatel-Lucent provides a “default” version of the mesh radio profile. You can use the
“default” version or create a new instance of a profile which you can then edit as you need. The mesh
radio profile allows you to specify the set of rates used to transmit data on the mesh link. Refer to
“Profiles > Mesh > Radio” on page 94.

Cluster—Mesh clusters are grouped and defined by a mesh cluster profile, which provides the
framework of the mesh network. Similar to virtual AP profiles, the mesh cluster profile contains the
MSSID (mesh cluster name), authentication methods, security credentials, and cluster priority required
for mesh nodes to associate with their neighbors and join the cluster. Associated mesh nodes store this
information in flash memory. Although most mesh deployments will require only a single mesh cluster
profile, you can configure and apply multiple mesh cluster profiles to an AP group or an individual AP. If
you have multiple cluster profiles, the mesh portal uses the profile with the highest priority to bring up
the mesh network. Mesh points, in contrast, go through the list of mesh cluster profiles in order of
priority to decide which profile to use to associate themselves with the network. The mesh cluster
priority determines the order by which the mesh cluster profiles are used. This allows you, rather than
the link metric algorithm, to explicitly segment the network by defining multiple cluster profiles. AlcatelLucent provides a “default” version of the mesh cluster profile. You can use the “default” version or
create a new instance of a profile which you can then edit as you need. You can configure a maximum of
16 mesh cluster profiles on a mesh node. Refer to “Profiles > Mesh > Cluster” on page 96.
Profiles > Mesh > Radio
The mesh radio profile allows you to specify the transmit power and set of rates used to transmit data on
the mesh link.
Perform these steps to create or edit Mesh Radio profiles.
1. Click Profiles > Mesh > Radio in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Radio profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing profile.
The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
Table 35 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > Mesh > Radio Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Maximum Children
(1-64)
64
Use this field to indicate the maximum number of children a mesh node
can accept. The supported range is from 1 to 64.
Maximum Hop
Count (1-32)
8
Use this field to indicate the maximum hop count from the mesh portal.
The supported range is from 1 to 32.
General Settings
Other Settings
94 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 35 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > Mesh > Radio Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Heartbeat
Threshold (1-255)
10
Use this field to indicate the maximum number of heartbeat messages that
can be lost between neighboring mesh nodes. The supported range is
from 1 to 255.
Link Threshold
(1-255)
12
Use this setting to optimize operation of the link metric algorithm.
Indicates the minimal RSSI value. If the RSSI value is below this threshold,
the link may be considered a subthreshold link. A sub-threshold link is one
whose average RSSI value falls below the configured link threshold.
If this occurs, the mesh node may try to find a better link on the same
channel and cluster (only neighbors on the same channel are considered).
The supported threshold is hardware dependent, with a practical range of
1 to 255.
Reselection Mode
startupsubthreshold
Use this setting to optimize operation of the link metric algorithm.
Specifies the method a mesh node uses to find a better uplink to create a
path to the mesh portal. Only neighbors
on the same channel in the same mesh cluster are considered.
Available options are:
 reselect-anytime—Connected mesh nodes evaluate mesh links every
30 seconds. If a mesh node finds a better uplink, the mesh node
connects to the new parent to create an improved path to the mesh
portal.
 reselect-never—Connected mesh nodes do not evaluate other mesh
links to create an improved path to the mesh portal.
 startup-subthreshold—When bringing up the mesh network, mesh
nodes have 3 minutes to find a better uplink. After that time, each
mesh node evaluates alternative links only if the existing uplink falls
below the configured threshold level (the link becomes a sub-threshold
link). The reselection process is cancelled if the average RSSI on the
existing uplink rises above the configured link-threshold.
 subthreshold-only—Connected mesh nodes evaluate alternative links
only if the existing uplink becomes a sub-threshold link.
NOTE: Alcatel-Lucent recommends using the default value.
Metric Algorithm
distributedtree-rssi
Use this setting to optimize operation of the link metric algorithm.
Specifies the algorithm used by a mesh node to select its parent.
Available options are:
 best-link-rssi—Selects the parent with the strongest RSSI, regardless
of the number of children a potential parent has.
 distributed-tree-rssi—Selects the parent based on link-RSSI and
node cost based on the number of children. This option evenly
distributes the mesh points over high quality uplinks. Low quality
uplinks are selected as a last resort.
NOTE: Alcatel-Lucent recommends using the default value.
802.11g Portal
Channel (1-14)
Blank
802.11a Portal
Channel (34-165)
Blank
Each 802.11a and 802.11g radio profile references an Adaptive Radio
Management (ARM) profile. When you assign an active ARM profile to a
mesh radio, ARM's automatic power-assignment and channel-assignment
features automatically select the radio channel with the least amount of
interference for each mesh portal, maximizing end user performance. In
earlier versions of this software, an AP with a mesh radio received its
beacon period, transmission power and 11a/11g portal channel settings
from its mesh radio profile. Mesh-access AP portals now inherit these
radio settings from their dot11a or dot11g radio profiles.
NOTE: Do not delete or modify mesh cluster profiles once you use them to
provision mesh nodes. You can recover the mesh point if the original
cluster profile is still available. Alcatel-Lucent recommends creating a new
mesh cluster profile if needed.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 95
Table 35 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > Mesh > Radio Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Beacon Period
(60-999999 msec)
100
Define the beacon period supporting mesh profiles, as described for the
fields immediately above.
Transmit Power
(0-30 dBm)
30
Define the transmission power supporting mesh profiles, as described for
the portal channel settings immediately above. This setting supports a
range from 0 to 30 dBm.
Retry Limit (0-15)
4
Indicate the number of times a mesh node can re-send a packet. This
setting supports a range from 0 to 15.
RTS Threshold
(256-2346 bytes)
2333
Define the packet size sent by mesh nodes. Mesh nodes transmitting
frames larger than this threshold must issue request to send (RTS) and
wait for other mesh nodes to respond with clear to send (CTS) to begin
transmission. This helps prevent mid-air collisions. The supported range is
from 256 to 2346 bytes.
802.11a Transmit
Rates
All selected
Indicate the transmit rates for the 802.11a radio. The AP attempts to use
the highest transmission rate to establish a mesh link. If a rate is
unavailable, the AP goes through the list and uses the next highest rate.
802.11g Transmit
Rates
All selected
Indicate the transmit rates for the 802.11g radio. The AP attempts to use
the highest transmission rate to establish a mesh link. If a rate is
unavailable, the AP goes through the list and uses the next highest rate.
Mesh Private VLAN
(0-4094)
0
Enter a VLAN ID for control traffic between an remote mesh portal and
mesh nodes. This VLAN ID must not be used for user traffic.
Range: 0-4094. Default: 0 (disabled).
BC/MC Rate
Optimization
Yes
Enable or disable scanning of all active stations currently associated to a
mesh point to select the lowest transmission rate based on the slowest
connected mesh child.
When enabled, this setting dynamically adjusts the multicast rate to that of
the slowest connected mesh child. Multicast frames are not sent if there
are no mesh children.
NOTE: Alcatel-Lucent recommends using the default value.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Radio profile appears on the Profiles > Mesh > Radio page.
Profiles > Mesh > Cluster
Alcatel-Lucent provides a “default” version of the mesh cluster profile. You can use the “default” version or
create a new instance of a profile which you can then edit as you need. You can configure a maximum of 16
mesh cluster profiles on a mesh node.
Perform these steps to create or edit Mesh Cluster profiles.
1. Click Profiles > Mesh > Cluster in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Cluster profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing profile.
The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
96 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 36 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > Mesh > Cluster Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated.
The drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the
profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Cluster Name
AlcatelLucent-mesh
Enter the mesh cluster name. The name can have a maximum of 32
characters, which is used as the MSSID. When you create a new cluster
profile, it is a member of the “Alcatel-Lucent-mesh” cluster.
NOTE: Each mesh cluster profile should have a unique MSSID. Configure a
new MSSID before you apply the mesh cluster profile.
To view existing mesh cluster profiles, use the command: show ap meshcluster-profile. A mesh portal chooses the best cluster profile and provisions it
for use. A mesh point can have a maximum of 16 cluster profiles
RF Band
a
Use this setting to indicate the band for mesh operation for multiband radios.
Select a or g.
Important: If you create more than one mesh cluster profile for an AP or AP
group, each mesh cluster profile must use the same band
Encryption
Open System
Use this setting to configure the data encryption, which can be either open
system (no authentication or h) or WPA2-PSK-AES (WPA2 with AES
encryption using a preshared key).
Alcatel-Lucent recommends selecting WPA2-PSK-AES and entering a
passphrase (see WPA Passphrase). Keep the passphrase in a safe place.
General Settings
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited Cluster profile appears on the Profiles > Mesh > Cluster page.
Profiles > QoS
The following QoS profiles configure traffic management and VoIP functions.

Traffic Management—Specifies the minimum percentage of available bandwidth to be allocated to a
specific SSID when there is congestion on the wireless network, and sets the interval between
bandwidth usage reports. Refer to “Profiles > QoS > Traffic Management” on page 97.

VoIP Call Admission Control—Alcatel-Lucent’s Voice Call Admission Control limits the number of
active voice calls per AP by load-balancing or ignoring excess call requests. This profile enables active
load balancing and call admission controls, and sets limits for the numbers of simultaneous Session
Initiated Protocol (SIP), SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP), Cisco Skinny Client Control Protocol (SCCP),
Vocera or New Office Environment (NOE) calls that can be handled by a single radio. Refer to “Profiles
> QoS > VoIP Call Admission Control” on page 98.
Profiles > QoS > Traffic Management
Perform these steps to create or edit Traffic Management profiles.
1. Click Profiles > QoS > Traffic Management in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Traffic Management profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an
existing profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 97
Table 37 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > QoS > Traffic Management Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated.
The drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the
profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Name of the threshold profile.
Report Interval
5
Set the time in minutes between the bandwidth usage report. The supported
range is from 1 to 9,999,999 minutes.
Station Shaping
Policy
default-access Select the policy from the drop-down menu, with these options:
 default-access
 fair access
 preferred access
General Settings
Other Settings
WLAN Bandwidths
WLAN
N/A
Click the Add button to specify, edit, or add a WLAN bandwidth allocation,
and the associated WLAN.
Bandwidth
Allocation
N/A
Use this control to allow you to set a minimum bandwidth to be allocated to a
virtual AP profile when there is congestion on the wireless network. Define this
as a percentage.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited profile appears on the Profiles > QoS > Traffic Management page.
Profiles > QoS > VoIP Call Admission Control
Alcatel-Lucent’s Voice Call Admission Control limits the number of active voice calls per AP by loadbalancing or ignoring excess call requests. This profile enables active load balancing and call admission
controls, and sets limits for the numbers of simultaneous Session Initiated Protocol (SIP), SpectraLink
Voice Priority (SVP), Cisco Skinny Client Control Protocol (SCCP), Vocera or New Office Environment
(NOE) calls that can be handled by a single radio.VoIP call admission control prevents any single AP from
becoming congested with voice calls. You configure call admission control options in the VoIP CAC profile
which you apply to an AP group or a specific AP.
In the VoIP Call Admission Control (CAC) profile, you can limit the number of active voice calls allowed on
a radio. This feature is disabled by default. When the disconnect extra call feature is enabled, the system
monitors the number of active voice calls, and if the defined threshold is reached, any new calls are
disconnected. The AP denies association requests from a device that is on call.
You enable this feature in the VoIP CAC profile. You also need to enable call admission control, which is
disabled by default, in this profile. Perform these steps to create or edit VoIP Call Admission Control
profiles.
1. Click Profiles > QoS > VoIP Call Admission Control in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new VoIP Call Admission Control profile, or click the pencil icon to edit
an existing profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
98 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 38 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > QoS > VoIP Call Admission Control Profile
Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters
that is separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using
folders, you can view basic statistics about device, and define which
users have visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the threshold profile.
VoIP Call Admission
Control
No
Enable or disable VoIP Call Admission Control in this profile.
VoIP Active Load
Balancing
No
Enable or disable load balancing in this profile.
VoIP Vocera Call
Capacity (0-255)
20
Specify the bandwidth allocation to Vocera voice calls when Admission
Control is enabled.
VoIP NOE Call
Capacity (0-255)
10
Specify the bandwidth allocation to New Office Environment (NOE)
voice calls when Admission Control is enabled.
VoIP SIP Call
Capacity (0-255)
10
Specify the bandwidth allocation to Session Initiated Protocol (SIP)
voice calls when Admission Control is enabled.
VoIP SVP Call
Capacity (0-255)
10
Specify the bandwidth allocation to SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP)
voice calls when Admission Control is enabled.
VoIP SCCP Call
Capacity (0-255)
10
Specify the bandwidth allocation to Cisco Skinny Client Control
Protocol (SCCP) voice calls when Admission Control is enabled.
VoIP H.323 Call
Capacity (0-255)
10
Specify the bandwidth allocation to H323 protocol traffic when
Admission Control is enabled.
VoIP T-Spec Call
Capacity (0-255)
10
A WMM client can send a Traffic Specification (TSPEC) signaling
request to the AP before sending traffic of a specific AC type, such as
voice. You can configure the WLAN switch so that the TSPEC signaling
request from a client is ignored if the underlying voice call is not active;
this feature is disabled by default. If you enable this feature, you can
also configure the number of seconds that a client must wait to start
the call after sending the TSPEC request (the default is one second).
You enable TSPEC signaling enforcement in the VoIP Call Admission
Control profile. This field specifies the bandwidth allocation to T-Spec
voice calls when Admission Control is enabled.
VoIP Call Handoff
20
Reservation (0-100%)
Specify the total bandwidth to be reserved for call handoff. This field is
a percentage of entire bandwidth.
VoIP High-capacity
Threshold (0-100%)
Specifies the threshold that defines high-capacity VoIP. This field is a
percentage of entire bandwidth.
General Settings
Other Settings
20
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 99
Table 38 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > QoS > VoIP Call Admission Control Profile
Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
VoIP Send SIP 100
Trying
No
The SIP invite call setup message is time-sensitive, as the originator
retries the call as quickly as possible if it does not proceed. You can
direct the WLAN switch to immediately reply to the call originator with a
“SIP 100 - trying” message to indicate that the call is proceeding and to
avoid a possible timeout. This is useful in conditions where the SIP
invite may be redirected through a number of servers before reaching
the WLAN switch.
Enable or disable SIP call setup keepalive with this field.
VoIP Disconnect
Extra Call
No
In the VoIP Call Admission Control (CAC) profile, you can limit the
number of active voice calls allowed on a radio. This feature is disabled
by default. When the disconnect extra call feature is enabled, the
system monitors the number of active voice calls, and if the defined
threshold is reached, any new calls are disconnected. The AP denies
association requests from a device that is on call.
Enable or disable this feature in this field. You also need to enable call
admission control, which is disabled by default, in this profile.
VoIP TSPEC
Enforcement
No
A WMM client can send a Traffic Specification (TSPEC) signaling
request to the AP before sending traffic of a specific AC type, such as
voice. You can configure the WLAN switch so that the TSPEC signaling
request from a client is ignored if the underlying voice call is not active;
this feature is disabled by default. If you enable this feature, you can
also configure the number of seconds that a client must wait to start
the call after sending the TSPEC request (the default is one second).
You enable TSPEC signaling enforcement in the VoIP Call Admission
Control profile. This field enables or disables TSPEC Enforcement.
VoIP TSPEC
Enforcement Period
(0-100)
1
When TSPEC is enabled, this field sets the number of seconds that a
client must wait to start the call after sending the TSPEC request.
VoIP Drop SIP Invite
and Send Status
Code (Client)
486
The SIP invite call setup message is time-sensitive, as the originator
retries the call as quickly as possible if it does not proceed. You can
direct the WLAN switch to immediately reply to the call originator with a
“SIP 100 - trying” message to indicate that the call is proceeding and to
avoid a possible timeout. This is useful in conditions where the SIP
invite may be redirected through a number of servers before reaching
the WLAN switch.
Use this field to enable or disable SIP call setup keepalive in the VoIP
Call Admission Control profile for the client.
VoIP Drop SIP Invite
and Send Status
Code (Server)
486
The SIP invite call setup message is time-sensitive, as the originator
retries the call as quickly as possible if it does not proceed. You can
direct the WLAN switch to immediately reply to the call originator with a
“SIP 100 - trying” message to indicate that the call is proceeding and to
avoid a possible timeout. This is useful in conditions where the SIP
invite may be redirected through a number of servers before reaching
the WLAN switch.
Use this field to enable or disable SIP call setup keepalive in the VoIP
Call Admission Control profile for the server.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited profile appears on the Profiles > QoS > VoIP Call Admission
Control page.
100 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > RF
The RF management profiles configure radio tuning and calibration, AP load balancing, coverage hole
detection, and RSSI metrics.

802.11a Radio—Defines AP radio settings for the 5 GHz frequency band, including the Adaptive Radio
Management (ARM) profile and the high-throughput (802.11n) radio profile. Refer to “Profiles > RF >
802.11a/g Radio” on page 101.

802.11g Radio—Defines AP radio settings for the 2.4 GHz frequency band, including the Adaptive
Radio Management (ARM) profile and the high-throughput (802.11n) radio profile. Each 802.11a and
802.11b radio profile includes a reference to an Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) profile. If you would
like the ARM feature to dynamically select the best channel and transmission power for the radio, verify
that the 802.11a/802.11g radio profile references an active and enabled ARM profile. If you want to
manually select a channel for each AP group, create separate 802.11a and 802.11g profiles for each AP
group and assign a different transmission channel for each profile. Refer to “Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g
Radio” on page 101.

ARM—Defines the Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) settings for scanning, acceptable coverage
levels, transmission power and noise thresholds. In most network environments, ARM does not need
any adjustments from its factory-configured settings. However, if you are using VoIP or have unusually
high security requirements you may want to manually adjust the ARM thresholds. Refer to “Profiles > RF
> 802.11a/g Radio > ARM” on page 103.

HT Radio—Manages high-throughput (802.11n) radio settings for 802.11n-capable APs. A highthroughput profile determines 40 Mhz tolerance settings, and controls whether or not APs using this
profile will advertise intolerance of 40 MHz operation. (This option is disabled by default, allowing 40
MHz operation.) Refer to “Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio > High-Throughput (HT) Radio” on page 106.

Event Thresholds—Defines error event conditions, based on a customizable percentage of low-speed
frames, non-unicast frames, or fragmented, retry or error frames. “Profiles > RF > Event Thresholds” on
page 107

Optimization—Enables or disables load balancing based on a user-defined number of clients or degree
of AP utilization on an AP. Use this profile to detect coverage holes, radio interference and STA
association failures and configure Received signal strength indication (RSSI) metrics. “Profiles > RF >
Optimization Profiles” on page 109
Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio
The two 802.11a and 802.11g RF management profiles for an AP configure its 802.11a (5 Ghz) and 802.11b/g
(2.4 GHz) radio settings. Use these profile settings to determine the channel, beacon period, transmit
power, and ARM profile for a mesh AP’s 5 GHz and 2.5 Ghz frequency bands. You can either use the
“default” version of each profile, or create a new 802.11a or 802.11g profile which you can then configure as
necessary. Each RF management profile also has a radio-enable parameter that allows you to enable or
disable the AP’s ability to simultaneously carry WLAN client traffic and mesh-backhaul traffic on that radio.
Radios are enabled by default.
Perform these steps to create or edit radio profiles for 802.11a or g. This type of radio profile references
additional profiles such as ARM and High-throughput Radio profiles. You have the chance to add or edit
supporting profiles as you define 802.11a/g Radio profiles.
1. Click Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g in the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane.
2. Click the appropriate Add button to create a new 802.11a or g profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an
existing profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 101
Table 39 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated.
The drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can view
basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to which
device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the threshold profile.
General Settings
Referenced Profiles
Adaptive Radio
Management
(ARM) Profile
default
Select an ARM profile from the drop-down menu to define ARM settings for your
802.11a/g radio profile. Click the pencil icon to edit an existing ARM profile, or
click the plus sign to create a new ARM profile. You are directed to the ARM
Profile setup page. Once you have configured this referenced ARM profile,
OV3600 returns you to the 802.11a/g radio profile page.
For additional ARM profile information, refer to “Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio
> ARM” on page 103.
High-throughput
Radio Profile
default-a
Select a high-throughput (HT) profile from the drop-down menu to define HT
settings for your 802.11a/g radio profile. Click the pencil icon to edit an existing
HT Radio profile, or click the plus sign to create a new HT Radio profile. You are
directed to the HT Radio Profile setup page. Once you have configured this
referenced profile, OV3600 returns you to the 802.11a/g Profile page.
For additional HT radio profile information, refer to “Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g
Radio > High-Throughput (HT) Radio” on page 106.
Radio Enable
Yes
Enable transmissions on this radio band.
Mode
ap-mode
Other Settings
Set the access Point operating mode. Available options are as follows:
am-mode—Air Monitor mode
 ap-mode—Access Point mode
 apm-mode—Access Point Monitor mode
 sensor-mode—RFprotect sensor mode

High Throughput
Enable (Radio)
Yes
Enable or disable high-throughput (802.11n) features on the radio.
Channel (34-165)
N/A
Set the transmit channel for this radio.
Secondary
Channel
None
Sets a secondary channel in relation to the primary channel defined just above.
Select an option as follows:
 None—no secondary channel
 Above—secondary channel is just above the channel defined in Channel field
 Below—secondary channel is just below the channel defined in the Channel
field
Beacon Period
100
Sets the Beacon Period for the AP in milliseconds. The supported range is from
60 to 30,000 milliseconds.
Transmit Power
15
Sets the Maximum transmit power (EIRP) in dBm from 0 to 30 in 0.5 dBm
increments. This setting is limited further by regulatory domain constraints and
AP capabilities.
102 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 39 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Advertise
802.11d and
802.11h
Capabilities
No
Enable or disable the radio to advertise its 802.11d (Country Information) and
802.11h (Transmit Power Control) capabilities.
Enable CSA
No
Enable or disable Channel Switch Announcements (CSAs), as defined by IEEE
802.11h. This setting enables an AP to announce that it is switching to a new
channel before it begins transmitting on that channel. This allows clients that
support CSA to transition to the new channel with minimal downtime.
CSA Count
(1-16)
4
Set the number of channel switch announcements that must be sent prior to
switching to a new channel.
Management
Frame Throttle
Interval
1
Set the averaging interval for rate limiting management frames from this radio, in
seconds. A management frame throttle interval of 0 seconds disables rate
limiting.
Management
Frame Throttle
Limit
20
Set the maximum number of management frames that can come in from this
radio in each throttle interval.
Protection for
802.11b Clients
Yes
Supported for 802.11g only, use this field to enable protection for 802.11b clients.
Disabling this protection violates the 802.11b standard and may cause
interoperability issues.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited 802.11a/g profile appears on the Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g page.
Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio > ARM
Each 802.11a and 802.11g radio profile references an Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) profile. When you
assign an active ARM profile to a mesh radio, ARM's automatic power-assignment and channel-assignment
features will automatically select the radio channel with the least amount of interference for each mesh
portal, maximizing end user performance. In earlier versions of this software, an AP with a mesh radio
received its beacon period, transmission power and 11a/11g portal channel settings from its mesh radio
profile. Mesh-access AP portals now inherit these radio settings from their dot11a or dot11g radio profiles.
Each ARM-enabled mesh portal monitors defined thresholds for interference, noise, errors, rogue APs and
radar settings, then calculates interference and coverage values and selects the best channel for its radio
band(s). The mesh portal communicates its channel selection to its mesh points via Channel Switch
Announcements (CSAs), and the mesh points will change their channel to match their mesh portal.
Although channel settings can still be defined for a mesh point via that mesh point's 802.11a and 802.11g
radio profiles, these settings will be overridden by any channel changes from the mesh portal. A mesh point
will take the same channel setting as its mesh portal, regardless of its associated clients. If you want to
manually assign channels to mesh portals or mesh points, disable the ARM profile associated with the
802.11a or 802.11g radio profile by setting the ARM profile’s assignment parameter to disable. The ARM
power adjustment feature does not apply to all ARM-enabled Mesh portals. Indoor mesh portals can take
advantage of this feature to adjust power settings according to their ARM profiles, but outdoor mesh portals
will continue to run at configured power level to maximize their range.
NOTE
Do not delete or modify mesh cluster profiles once you use them to provision mesh nodes. You can recover the mesh
point if the original cluster profile is still available. Alcatel-Lucent recommends creating a new mesh cluster profile if
needed.
Perform these steps to create or edit an adaptive radio management (ARM) profile.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 103
1. Click Profiles > RF > ARM in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new ARM profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing profile.
The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
Table 40 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > ARM Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated.
The drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can view
basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to which
device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Assignment
singleband
Activates one of four ARM channel/power assignment modes.
 disable—Disables ARM calibration and reverts APs back to default channel
and power settings specified by the AP’s radio profile
 maintain—APs maintain their current channel and power settings. This
setting can be used to maintain AP channel and power levels after ARM has
initially selected the best settings.
 multi-band—For single-radio APs, this value computes ARM assignments for
both 5 GHZ (802.11a) and 2.4 GHZ (802.11b/g) frequency bands.
 single-band—For dual-radio APs, this value enables APs to change transmit
power and channels within their same frequency band, and to adapt to
changing channel conditions.
Allowed Bands
for 40MHz
Channels
a-only
Set the 802.11 radio bands to be supported by this ARM profile. The drop-down
menu supports the following options:
 a-only—802.11a radio bands
 g-only—802.11g radio bands
 all—both 802.11a and g bands
Client Aware
Yes
If the Client Aware option is enabled, the AP does not change channels if there is
active client traffic on that AP. If Client Aware is disabled, the AP may change to
a more optimal channel, but this change may also disrupt current client traffic.
Max Tx Power
(dBm)
30
Set the highest transmit power levels for the AP, from 0-30 dBm in 3 dBm
increments. Higher power level settings may be constrained by local regulatory
requirements and AP capabilities. In the event that an AP is configured for a Max
Tx Power setting it cannot support, this value will be reduced to the highest
supported power setting.
NOTE: Power settings will not change if the Assignment option is set to disabled
or maintain.
Min Tx Power
(dBm)
0
Set the lowest transmit power levels for the AP, from 0-30 dBm, in 3 dBm
increments. Note that power settings will not change if the Assignment option is
set to disabled or maintain.
NOTE: Consider configuring a Min Tx Power setting higher than the default value
if most of your APs are placed on the ceiling. APs on a ceiling often have good
line of sight between them, which will cause ARM to decrease their power to
prevent interference. However, if the wireless clients down on the floor do not
have such a clear line back to the AP, you could end up with coverage gaps.
General Settings
Other Settings
104 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 40 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > ARM Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Multi Band Scan
Yes
If enabled, single radio channel APs scans for rogue APs across multiple
channels. This option requires that Scanning is also enabled.
The Multi Band Scan option does not apply to APs that have two radios, such as
an Alcatel-Lucent AP-65 or AP-70, as these devices already scan across multiple
channels. If one of these dual-radio devices are assigned an ARM profile with
Multi Band enabled, that device will ignore this setting.
Rogue AP Aware No
If you have enabled both the Scanning and Rogue AP options, Alcatel-Lucent
APs may change channels to contain off-channel rogue APs with active clients.
This security feature allows APs to change channels even if the Client Aware
setting is disabled.
This setting is disabled by default, and should only be enabled in high-security
environments where security requirements are allowed to consume higher levels
of network resources. You may prefer to receive Rogue AP alerts via SNMP traps
or syslog events.
Scan Interval
(sec)
10
If Scanning is enabled, the Scan Interval defines how often the AP will leave its
current channel to scan other channels in the band.
Off-channel scanning can impact client performance. Typically, the shorter the
scan interval, the higher the impact on performance. If you are deploying a large
number of new APs on the network, you may want to lower the Scan Interval to
help those APs find their optimal settings more quickly. Raise the Scan Interval
back to its default setting after the APs are functioning as desired.
The supported range for this setting is 0 to 2,147,483,647 seconds.
Active Scan
No
When the Active Scan checkbox is selected, an AP initiates active scanning via
probe request. This option elicits more information from nearby APs, but also
creates additional management traffic on the network.
Active Scan is disabled by default, and should not be enabled except under the
direct supervision of Alcatel-Lucent or Alcatel-Lucent Support.
Scanning
Yes
The Scanning field enables or disables AP scanning across multiple channels.
Disabling this option also disables the following scanning features:
 Multi Band Scan
 Rogue AP Aware
 Voip Aware Scan
 Power Save Scan
Do not disable Scanning unless you want to disable ARM and manually
configure AP channel and transmission power.
Scan Time
110 msec
The amount of time, in milliseconds, an AP will drift out of the current channel to
scan another channel. The supported range for this setting is 50 to 2,147,483,647
milliseconds. Alcatel-Lucent recommends a scan time between 50 to 200 msec.
VoIP Aware Scan No
Alcatel-Lucent’s VoIP Call Admission Control (CAC) prevents any single AP from
becoming congested with voice calls. When you enable CAC, you should also
enable VoIP Aware Scan in the ARM profile, so the AP will not attempt to scan a
different channel if one of its clients has an active VoIP call. This option requires
that Scanning is also enabled.
Power Save
Aware Scan
Yes
If enabled, the AP will not scan a different channel if it has one or more clients and
is in power save mode.
Ideal Coverage
Index
10
The Alcatel-Lucent coverage index metric is a weighted calculation based on the
RF coverage for all Alcatel-Lucent APs and neighboring APs on a specified
channel. The Ideal Coverage Index specifies the ideal coverage that an AP
should try to achieve on its channel. The denser the AP deployment, the lower
this value should be. The range of possible values is 2 to 20.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 105
Table 40 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > ARM Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Acceptable
Coverage Index
4
For multi-band implementations, the Acceptable Coverage Index specifies the
minimal coverage an AP it should achieve on its channel. The denser the AP
deployment, the lower this value should be. The range of possible values is 1 to
6.
Free Channel
Index
25
The Alcatel-Lucent Interference index metric measures interference for a
specified channel and its surrounding channels. This value is calculated and
weighted for all APs on those channels (including 3rd-party APs). An AP will only
move to a new channel if the new channel has a lower interference index value
than the current channel.
Free Channel Index specifies the required difference between the two
interference index values before the AP moves to the new channel. The lower this
value, the more likely it is that the AP will move to the new channel. The range of
possible values is 10 to 40.
Backoff Time
240
Sets the backoff time in seconds. After an AP changes channel or power settings,
it waits for the backoff time interval before it asks for a new channel/power
setting. The range of possible values is 120 to 3,600 seconds.
Error Rate
Threshold
50
Sets the minimum percentage of PHY errors and MAC errors in the channel that
will trigger a channel change.
Error Rate Wait
Time
30
Sets the minimum time in seconds the error rate has to exceed the Error Rate
Threshold before it triggers a channel change.
Noise Threshold
(-dBm)
-75
Sets the maximum level of noise in channel that triggers a channel change. The
range of possible values is 0 to -2,147,483,647 dBm.
Noise Wait Time
120
Sets the minimum time in seconds the noise level has to exceed the Noise
Threshold before it triggers a channel
change. The range of possible values is 120-3600 seconds.
Minimum Scan
Time
8
Sets the minimum number of times a channel must be scanned before it is
considered for assignment. The supported range for this setting is 0 to
2,147,483,647 scans. Alcatel-Lucent recommends a Minimum Scan Time
between 1 to 20 scans.
Load Aware
Scan Thresholds
1,250,000
Sets the traffic throughput level an AP must reach before it stops scanning. Load
aware ARM preserves network resources during periods of high traffic by
temporarily halting ARM scanning if the load for the AP gets too high. The
supported range for this setting is 0 to 20000000 bytes/second. (Specify 0 to
disable this feature.)
Mode Aware
Arm
No
Sets mode aware functions on the APs. If enabled, ARM turns APs into Air
Monitors (AMs) if it detects higher coverage levels than necessary. This helps
avoid higher levels of interference on the WLAN. Although this setting is disabled
by default, you may want to enable this feature if your APs are deployed in close
proximity (for example, less than 60 feet apart).
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited ARM profile appears on the Profiles > RF > ARM page.
4. Repeat this procedure or continue to additional procedures to complete profile configuration, then
reference this profile as desired.
Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio > High-Throughput (HT) Radio
Perform these steps to create or edit High Throughput (HT) Radio profiles.
1. Click Profiles > RF > HT Radio in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new HT Radio profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing profile.
The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
106 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 41 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > HT Radio Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated.
The drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the
profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
40MHz
Intolerance
No
Allows a radio using this profile to stop using the 40 MHz channels if the 40
MHz intolerance indication is received from another AP or station.
Honor 40MHz
Intolerance
Yes
Select 40 MHz intolerance if you want to enable 40 MHz intolerance. This
parameter controls whether or not APs using this high-throughput profile will
advertise intolerance of 40 MHz operation. By default, this option is disabled
and 40 MHz operation is allowed.
Legacy Station
Workaround
No
Use this setting to allow or disallow associations from legacy (non-HT)
stations.
General Settings
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited HT Radio profile appears on the Profiles > RF > HT Radio page.
Profiles > RF > Event Thresholds
Perform these steps to create or edit Event Threshold profiles.
1. Click Profiles > RF > Event Thresholds in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Event Thresholds profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing
profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
Table 42 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > Event Thresholds Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated.
The drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can view
basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to which
device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the thresholds profile.
Detect Frame
Rate Anomalies
No
Enables or disables alerts for frame rate anomalies.
Bandwidth Rate
High Watermark
0
Sets a high percentage watermark for bandwidth rate. When exceeded, this
threshold triggers a high-watermark-exceeded alert. Defining 0% disables this
function.
General Settings
Other Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 107
Table 42 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > Event Thresholds Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Bandwidth Rate
Low Watermark
0
Sets a low percentage watermark for bandwidth rate. When exceeded, this
threshold triggers a low-watermark-exceeded alert. Defining 0% disables this
function.
Frame Error
Rate High
Watermark
50
Sets a high percentage watermark for frame error rates. When frame error rates
exceed this threshold, this setting triggers a high-watermark-exceeded alert.
Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame Error
Rate Low
Watermark
10
Sets a low percentage watermark for frame error rates. When frame error rates
exceed this threshold, this setting triggers a low-watermark-exceeded alert.
Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame
Fragmentation
Rate High
Watermark
0
Sets a high percentage watermark for frame fragmentation rates. When frame
fragmentation rates exceed this threshold, this setting triggers a high-watermarkexceeded alert. Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame
Fragmentation
Rate Low
Watermark
0
Sets a low percentage watermark for frame fragmentation rates. When frame
fragmentation rates exceed this threshold, this setting triggers a low-watermarkexceeded alert. Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame Low
Speed Rate High
Watermark
0
Sets a high percentage watermark for low speed rates. When the percentage of
received and transmitted frames at low speed (less that 5.5Mbps for 802.11b and
less than 24 Mbps for 802.11a) exceeds the configured high watermark, the
system generates an alert. Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame Low
Speed Rate Low
Watermark
0
Sets a low percentage watermark for low speed rates. When the percentage of
received and transmitted frames at low speed (less that 5.5Mbps for 802.11b and
less than 24 Mbps for 802.11a) exceeds the configured Low Watermark, the
system generates an alert. Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame Non
Unicast Rate
High Watermark
0
Sets a high percentage watermark for non-Unicast frame rate. When the
percentage of non-Unicast frames exceeds the configured high watermark, the
system generates an alert. Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame Non
Unicast Rate
Low Watermark
0
Sets a low percentage watermark for non-Unicast frame rate. When the
percentage of non-Unicast frames exceeds the configured low watermark, the
system generates an alert. Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame Receive
Error Rate High
Watermark
50
Sets a high percentage watermark for frame-receive errors. When the percentage
of errors in received frames exceeds the configured high watermark, the system
generates an alert. Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame Receive
Error Rate Low
Watermark
10
Sets a low percentage watermark for frame-receive errors. When the percentage
of errors in received frames exceeds the configured low watermark, the system
generates an alert. Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame Retry
Rate High
Watermark
50
Sets a high percentage watermark for frame retry levels. When the percentage of
frame retries exceeds the configured high watermark, the system generates an
alert. Defining 0% disables this function.
Frame Retry
Rate Low
Watermark
10
Sets a low percentage watermark for frame retry levels. When the percentage of
frame retries exceeds the configured low watermark, the system generates an
alert. Defining 0% disables this function.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited profile appears on the Profiles > RF > Event Thresholds page.
108 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > RF > Optimization Profiles
The RF Optimization profile enables or disables load balancing based on a user-defined number of clients or
degree of AP utilization on an AP. Use this profile to detect coverage holes, radio interference and STA
association failures and configure Received signal strength indication (RSSI) metrics.
Perform these steps to create or edit Optimization profiles.
1. Click Profiles > RF > Optimization in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. This page summarizes the
current cluster profiles.
2. Click the Add button to create a new Optimization profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing
profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
Table 43 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > Optimization Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the threshold profile.
General Settings
Other Settings
AP Load Balancing No
Enable or disable AP load balancing based on a user-defined number of
clients or the degree of AP utilization on an AP.
AP Load Balancing
Max Retries
(0-100,000)
8
Set the maximum number of times that an AP attempts load balancing
before timing out.
AP Load Balancing
User High
Watermark
(0-100,000)
0
Set the high watermark level for the number of users that AP load balancing
is to support. The supported range is 0 to 100,000 users, and setting this
field to 0 users disables this function. When the number of users exceeds
the high watermark, it triggers an alert.
AP Load Balancing
User Low
Watermark
(0-100,000)
0
Set the low watermark level for the number of users that AP load balancing
is to support. The supported range is 0 to 100,000 users, and setting this
field to 0 users disables this function. When the number of users exceeds
the low watermark, it triggers an alert.
AP Load Balancing
Util High
Watermark
(0-100%)
0
Set the high watermark level as a percentage of load balancing utilization.
The supported range is 0 to 100%, and a value of 0% disables this function.
When this watermark is exceeded, it triggers an alert or wait time.
AP Load Balancing
Util Low
Watermark
(0-100%)
0
Set the low watermark level as a percentage of load balancing utilization.
The supported range is 0 to 100%, and a value of 0% disables this function.
When this watermark is exceeded, it triggers an alert or wait time.
AP Load Balancing
Util Wait Time
(0-360,000 sec)
0
Set the wait time for the AP when AP load balancing is enabled. When load
balancing thresholds are exceeded, this setting defines the length of time
before AP load balancing restarts on the AP. The supported range is 0 to
360,000 seconds, and defining a value of 0 disables this function.
Station Handoff
Assist
No
Enable or disable the ability of APs to hand users over to another adjacent
AP, as available, in order to optimize or improve general network load.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 109
Table 43 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > Optimization Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Detect Association
Failure
No
Enable or disable an AP’s ability to detect failures in wireless user
associations.
Coverage Hole
Detection
No
Enable or disable an AP’s ability to detect areas where an otherwise good
RF signal is not reaching wireless clients to an adequate level.
This setting requires a Wireless Intrusion Protection license.
Hole Good RSSI
Threshold
(0-65,535)
20
Set the amount of time in seconds during which Received Signal Strength
Indication (RSSI) is to check coverage holes.
This setting requires a Wireless Intrusion Protection license.
Hole Good Station
Ageout (sec)
30
Set the amount of time in seconds that an AP is unseen by any probes
before it is deleted from the database. Enter 0 to disable ageout.
This setting requires a Wireless Intrusion Protection license.
Hole Detection
Interval (sec)
180
Sets the amount of time in seconds in which automatic hole detection
should check for coverage holes. Enter 0 to disable this function.
This setting requires a Wireless Intrusion Protection license.
Hole Idle Station
Timeout (sec)
90
Sets the amount of time in seconds before which an idle AP is deleted from
the database, once it has become idle. Enter 0 to disable this function.
This setting requires a Wireless Intrusion Protection license.
Hole Poor RSSI
Threshold
(0-65,535)
10
Sets the threshold at which RSSI deems coverage to be poor.
Detect
Interference
No
Enables or disables interference detection for the APs to be configured with
this optimization profile.
Interference
Threshold
(0-100%)
100
Sets the maximum allowable interference to be tolerated by APs that are
configured with this optimization profile, as a percentage.
Interference
Threshold Exceed
Time
(0-360000 sec)
60
Sets the amount of time in seconds during which interference is allowed to
exceed the threshold percentage. When interference exceeds the threshold
percentage longer than the amount of time specified in this field, the
threshold has been exceeded.
Interference
Baseline Time
(0-360000 sec)
600
Sets the period of time in seconds during which interference levels are to be
monitored. This setting governs the deployment of the interference
percentage threshold and the threshold exceed time.
RSSI Falloff Wait
Time (0-8 sec)
0
Sets the maximum time to wait with decreasing received signal strength
indication (RSSI) before de-authorization is sent to the client.
Low RSSI
Threshold (0-255)
0
Sets the low threshold for received signal strength indication (RSSI). If the
RSSI for a specific client falls below this threshold and continues to fall for
the RSSI Falloff Wait Time, then the AP sends a de-authorization command
to the client. Such de-authorization removes the client from the current AP
and forces it to re-authentication on a nearby AP.
RSSI Check
Frequency (0-255)
0
Sets the amount of time in seconds between RSSI coverage checks.
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited profile appears on the Profiles > RF > Optimization page.
110 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > SSID
Configures network authentication and encryption types. This profile also includes references an EDCA
Parameters Station Profile, an EDCA Parameters AP Profile and a High-throughput 9HT) SSID profile.

SSID—The SSID profile defines SSID settings and references additional EDCA and HT profiles. Refer to
“Profiles > EDCA AP” on page 111.

EDCA AP—AP to client traffic prioritization, including EDCA parameters for background, best-effort,
voice and video queues. Refer to “Profiles > SSID > EDCA AP” on page 115.

EDCA Station—Client to AP traffic prioritization parameters, including Enhanced Distributed Channel
Access (EDCA) parameters for background, best-effort, voice and video queues. Refer to “Profiles >
SSID > EDCA Station” on page 118.

HT SSID—High-throughput APs support additional settings not available in legacy APs. A Highthroughput SSID profile can enable or disable high-throughput (802.11n) features and 40 Mhz channel
usage, and define values for aggregated MAC protocol data units (MDPUs) and Modulation and Coding
Scheme (MCS) ranges. If none of the APs in your mesh deployment are 802.11n-capable APs, you do not
need to configure a high-throughput SSID profile. If you modify a currently provisioned and running
high-throughput SSID profile, your changes take affect immediately. You do not reboot the WLAN switch
or the AP. Refer to “Profiles > SSID > HT SSID” on page 121.
Profiles > EDCA AP
Perform these steps to create or edit EDCA AP profiles.
1. Click Profiles > SSID > EDCA AP in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. This page summarizes the SSID
profiles currently configured.
2. Click the Add button to create a new EDCA AP profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing profile.
The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
Table 44 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > EDCA AP Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated. The
drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is separate
from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can view basic statistics
about device, and define which users have visibility to which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Displays the name of the profile.
General
Settings
Referenced Profiles
EDCA
Parameters
Station Profile
None
The drop-down menu allows you to select any EDCA Station profile that has already
been configured. The referenced EDCA Station profile defines several settings that are
used in the SSID profile. Click the Plus sign to create a new EDCA Station profile, as
required.
For additional information about this profile type, refer to “Profiles > SSID > EDCA
Station” on page 118.
Referencing an EDCA Station profile requires a Voice Service license.
EDCA
Parameters
AP Profile
None
The drop-down menu allows you to select any EDCA AP profile that has already been
configured. The referenced EDCA AP profile defines several settings that are used in
the SSID profile. Click the Plus sign to create a new EDCA AP profile, as required.
For additional information about this profile type, refer to “Profiles > SSID > EDCA
AP” on page 115.
Referencing an EDCA Station profile requires a Voice Service license.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 111
Table 44 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > EDCA AP Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Highthroughput
SSID Profile
default
The drop-down menu allows you to select any High-throughput SSID profile that has
already been configured. The referenced HT profile defines several settings that are
used in the SSID profile. Click the Plus sign to create a new HT SSID profile, as
required.
For additional information about this profile type, refer to “Profiles > SSID > HT
SSID” on page 121.
Security Settings
Encryption
opensyst Select any encryption type to be supported in this SSID profile. The supported
em
encryption types are as follows:
 xSec—Encrypts an original Layer-2 data frame inside a Layer-2 xSec frame, the
contents of which are defined by the protocol. xSec relies on 256-bit Advanced
Encryption Standard (AES) encryption.
 opensystem—No information sent to the client in plain text
 static-wep—Static Wired Equivalent Privacy
 dynamic-wep—Dynamic WEP with a key management service
 wpa-tkip—Wi-Fi Protected Access with Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
 wpa-aes—Wi-Fi-Protected-Access-Advanced Encryption Standard
 wpa-psk-tkip—Wi-Fi-Protected-Access-Preshared Key-Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol
 wpa-psk-aes—Wi-Fi Protected Access-Preshared Key-Advanced Encryption
Standard
 wpa2-aes—Wi-Fi-Protected Access that adds AES and CCMP
 wpa2-psk-aes—Wi-Fi Protected Access that adds Preshared Key and Advanced
Encryption Standard
 wpa2-psk-tkip—Wi-Fi Protected Access that adds Preshared Key and Temporal
Key Integrity Protocol
 wpa2-tkip—Wi-Fi Protected Access that adds Temporary Key Integrity Protocol
WEP Transmit
Key Index
1
Drop-down menu allows you to specify the key index for Wired Equivalent Privacy.
WEP Key 1
N/A
Enter WEP Key 1, and confirm the key in the Confirm field.
WEP Key 2
N/A
Enter WEP Key 2, and confirm the key in the Confirm field.
WEP Key 3
N/A
Enter WEP Key 3, and confirm the key in the Confirm field.
WEP Key 4
N/A
Enter WEP Key 4, and confirm the key in the Confirm field.
WPA Hexkey
N/A
Enter the hex key to be used with Wi-Fi Protected Access.
WPA
Passphrase
N/A
Enter a difficult-to-guess passphrase between eight and 63 characters.
DTIM Interval
(1-255 beacon
periods)
1
Enter the Delivery Traffic Indication Message that informs wireless clients about the
presence of buffered, multicast, or broadcast data on the AP. The DTIM interval
specifies the beacon frequency that synchronizes the AP to the network. This setting
supports 1 to 255 milliseconds.
Station Ageout
Time
1000
Enter the amount of time, in minutes, that a client is unseen by any probes before it is
deleted from the database. Enter 0 to disable ageout.
802.11g
Transmit
Rates
All
selected
Specify the total transmit rates for the 802.11g radio. The AP attempts to use the
highest transmission rate to establish a mesh link. If a rate is unavailable, the AP goes
through the list and uses the next highest rate. All transmission rates are selected and
used. If you do not select 802.11a or 802.11g transmit rates, all rates are selected by
default when you click Apply.
Other Settings
112 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 44 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > EDCA AP Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
802.11g Basic
Rates
1 and 2
selected
Specify the basic rates for the 802.11g radio.
802.11a
Transmit
Rates
All
selected
Specify the transmit rates for the 802.11a radio. The AP attempts to use the highest
transmission rate to establish a mesh link. If a rate is unavailable, the AP goes through
the list and uses the next highest rate. All transmission rates are selected and used by
default. If you do not select 802.11a or 802.11g transmit rates, all rates are selected
by default when you click Apply.
802.11a Basic
Rates
6, 12,
and 24
selected
Specify the basic rates for the 802.11a radio.
Max Transmit
Attempts
8
Specify the maximum number of transmit attempts. The supported range is 1 to 15.
RTS threshold
(bytes)
2333
Specify the Request to Send parameter that defines the packet size sent by mesh
nodes. Mesh nodes transmitting frames larger than this threshold must issue request
to send (RTS) and wait for other mesh nodes to respond with clear to send (CTS) to
begin transmission. This helps prevent mid-air collisions.
A smaller value causes more RTS packets to be sent more often, possibly impacting
bandwidth. However, a smaller value may help the system recover more quickly from
interference or data packet collisions. Specify the size in bytes.
Short
Preamble
Yes
Instructs the AP to use short preambles in packets. Short preambles are often
standard in AP configuration.
Max
Associations
64
Define the maximum associations to be supported by devices configured with this
SSID profile. The range is from 0 to 255.
Wireless
Multimedia
(WMM)
No
Specify whether the devices are to support wireless multimedia (WMM): voice, video,
best effort (BE), or background.
Wireless
Multimedia
U-ASPD
Powersave
Yes
Enable or disable unscheduled-automatic power save delivery. U-ASPD allows the
saving of WLAN client power. The WLAN client transmits frames that trigger the
forwarding of data frames for a client that has been buffered at the AP for power
saving purposes.
WMM TSPEC
Min Inactivity
Interval
0
A WMM client can send a Traffic Specification (TSPEC) signaling request to the AP
before sending traffic of a specific AC type, such as voice. You can configure the
WLAN switch so that the TSPEC signaling request from a client is ignored if the
underlying voice call is not active; this feature is disabled by default. If you enable this
feature, you can also configure the number of seconds that a client must wait to start
the call after sending the TSPEC request (the default is one second). You enable
TSPEC signaling enforcement in the VoIP Call Admission Control profile. The
supported range is 0 to 3,600,000 milliseconds.
DSCP
Mapping for
WMM Voice
AC
N/A
Specify Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) mapping for wireless multimedia
voice admission control. The supported range is 0 to 63.
The IEEE 802.11e standard defines the mapping between WMM ACs and
Differentiated Services Codepoint (DSCP) tags. The WMM AC mapping setting allows
you to customize the mapping between WMM ACs and DSCP tags to prioritize
various traffic types: voice, video, best effort, and background.
DSCP
Mapping for
WMM Video
AC
N/A
Specify Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) mapping for wireless multimedia
video admission control. The supported range is 0 to 63.
DSCP
Mapping for
WMM BestEffort AC
N/A
Specify Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) mapping for wireless multimedia
best effort admission control. The supported range is 0 to 63.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 113
Table 44 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > EDCA AP Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
DSCP
Mapping for
WMM
Background
AC
N/A
Specify Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) mapping for wireless multimedia
background admission control. The supported range is 0 to 63.
902il
Compatibility
Mode
No
Enable or disable support for NEC 902il compatibility.
Deny
Broadcast
Probes
No
Deny or accept broadcast probes. This setting is used in conjunction with Local Probe
Response. An AP broadcasts its configured service set identifier (SSID), which
corresponds to a specific wireless local area network (WLAN). Wireless clients
discover APs by listening for broadcast beacons or by sending active probes to
search for APs with a specific SSID.
Local Probe
Response
Yes
For deployments where there are expected to be considerable delays between the
WLAN switch and APs (for example, in a remote location where an AP is not in range
of another Alcatel-Lucent AP), Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you enable the “local
probe response” option in the SSID profile. (Generating probe responses on the
Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch is an optimization that allows AOS-W to make better
decisions.) This option is enabled by default in the SSID profile. You can also increase
the value for the bootstrap threshold in the AP System profile to minimize the chance
of the AP rebooting due to temporary loss of connectivity with the Alcatel-Lucent
WLAN switch.
Disable Probe
Retry
Yes
Prevent (disable Yes) or accept (disable No) the resending of packets in local probe
operations.
NOTE: This setting requires a voice service license.
Battery Boost
No
Battery boost converts all multicast traffic to unicast before delivery to the client. This
feature is disabled by default. Enabling this feature on an SSID allows you to set the
DTIM interval from 10 - 100 (the previous allowed values were 1 or 2), equating to
1,000 - 10,000 milliseconds. This longer interval keeps associated
wireless clients from activating their radios for multicast indication and delivery, leaving
them in powersave mode longer, and thus lengthening battery life. The DTIM
configuration is performed on the WLAN, so no configuration is necessary on the client.
NOTE: This setting requires a voice service license.
NOTE: Although you can enable battery boost on a per-virtual AP basis, it must be
enabled for any SSIDs that support voice traffic.
Although the multicast to unicast conversion generates more traffic, that traffic is
buffered by the AP and delivered to the client when the client emerges from powersave mode. An associated parameter available on some clients is the Listening
Interval (LI). This defines the interval (in number of beacons) after which the client
must wake to read the Traffic Indication Map (TIM). The TIM indicates whether there is
buffered unicast traffic for each sleeping client. With battery boost enabled, the DTIM
is increased but multicast traffic is buffered and delivered as unicast. Increasing the LI
can further increase battery life, but can also decrease client responsiveness.
Maximum
Transmit
Failures
0
Specify the maximum number of transmit failures to be supported before a radio is
considered to be down. A setting of 0 disables this feature.
BC/MC Rate
Optimization
No
Enables or disables scanning of all active stations currently associated to a mesh
point to select the lowest transmission rate based on the slowest connected mesh
child. When enabled, this setting dynamically adjusts the multicast rate to that of the
slowest connected mesh child. Multicast frames are not sent if there are no mesh
children.
NOTE: Alcatel-Lucent recommends using the default value.
Strict Spectralink Voice
Protocol (SVP)
No
Use this setting for Spectralink VoIP devices. This setting automatically permits and
prioritizes the Spectralink Voice Protocol (SVP).
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited profile appears on the Profiles > SSID page.
114 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > SSID > EDCA AP
Wireless Multimedia (WMM) provides media access prioritization through Enhanced Distributed Channel
Access (EDCA). EDCA defines four access categories (ACs) to prioritize traffic: voice, video, best effort,
and background. These ACs correspond to 802.1d priority tags, as shown in Table 45.
Table 45 WMM Access Categories and 802.1d Tags
WMM Access Category
Description
802.1d Tag
Voice
Highest priority
7, 6
Video
Prioritize video traffic above other data traffic
5, 4
Best Effort
Traffic from legacy devices or traffic from applications or
devices that do not support QoS
0, 3
Background
Low priority traffic (file downloads, print jobs)
2, 1
While the WMM ACs designate specific types of traffic, you can determine the priority of the ACs. For
example, you can choose to give video traffic the highest priority. With WMM, applications assign data
packets to an AC. In the client, the data packets are then added to one of the transmit queues for voice,
video, best effort, or background.
WMM is an extension to the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol’s
Distributed Coordination Function (DCF). The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic
prioritization depends on the following configurable parameters for each AC:

arbitrary inter-frame space number (AIFSN)

minimum and maximum contention window (CW) size
For each AC, the backoff time is the sum of the AIFSN and a random value between 0 and the CW value. The
AC with the lowest backoff time is granted the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). Frames with the highest
priority AC are more likely to get TXOP as they tend to have the lowest backoff times (a result of having
smaller AIFSN and CW parameter values). The value of the CW varies through time as the CW doubles after
each collision up to the maximum CW. The CW is reset to the minimum value after successful transmission.
In addition, you can configure the TXOP duration for each AC. On the WLAN switch, you configure the AC
priorities in the WLAN EDCA parameters profile. There are two sets of EDCA profiles you can configure:

AP parameters affect traffic from the AP to the client

STA parameters affect traffic from the client to the AP
Perform these steps to create or edit EDCA AP profiles.
1. Click Profiles > SSID > EDCA AP in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. This page summarizes the current
profiles of this type.
2. Click the Add button to create a new EDCA AP profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing profile.
The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 46:
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 115
Table 46 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > SSID > EDCA Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Name of the EADC AP profile.
Arbitrary Interframe Space
Number (1-15)
3
Minimum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
(0-15)
4
WMM is an extension to the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol’s Distributed Coordination Function (DCF).
The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic prioritization
depends on the following configurable parameters for each AC:
 arbitrary inter-frame space number (AIFSN)
 minimum and maximum contention window (CW) size
Maximum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
(1-15)
6
Transmission
Opportunity Slots
in 32 usec Units
0
For each AC, the backoff time is the sum of the AIFSN and a random value
between 0 and the CW value. The AC with the lowest backoff time is
granted the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). Frames with the highest
priority AC are more likely to get TXOP as they tend to have the lowest
backoff times (a result of having smaller AIFSN and CW parameter values).
The value of the CW varies through time as the CW doubles after each
collision up to the maximum CW. The CW is reset to the minimum value
after successful transmission.
In addition, you can configure the TXOP duration for each AC.
Arbitrary Interframe Space
Number
7
Minimum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
4
WMM is an extension to the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol’s Distributed Coordination Function (DCF).
The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic prioritization
depends on the following configurable parameters for each AC:
 arbitrary inter-frame space number (AIFSN)
 minimum and maximum contention window (CW) size
Maximum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
10
Transmission
Opportunity Slots
in 32 usec Units
0
General Settings
Best Effort
Background
116 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Set the transmission opportunity slots in 32-micro-second intervals.
For each AC, the backoff time is the sum of the AIFSN and a random value
between 0 and the CW value. The AC with the lowest backoff time is
granted the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). Frames with the highest
priority AC are more likely to get TXOP as they tend to have the lowest
backoff times (a result of having smaller AIFSN and CW parameter values).
The value of the CW varies through time as the CW doubles after each
collision up to the maximum CW. The CW is reset to the minimum value
after successful transmission.
In addition, you can configure the TXOP duration for each AC.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 46 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > SSID > EDCA Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
ACM
No
Define whether or not admission control mandatory (ACM) is to be
supported on APs configured with this EDCA profile.
Arbitrary Interframe Space
Number
1
Minimum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
3
WMM is an extension to the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol’s Distributed Coordination Function (DCF).
The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic prioritization
depends on the following configurable parameters for each AC:
 arbitrary inter-frame space number (AIFSN)
 minimum and maximum contention window (CW) size
Maximum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
4
Transmission
Opportunity Slots
in 32 usec Units
94
For each AC, the backoff time is the sum of the AIFSN and a random value
between 0 and the CW value. The AC with the lowest backoff time is
granted the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). Frames with the highest
priority AC are more likely to get TXOP as they tend to have the lowest
backoff times (a result of having smaller AIFSN and CW parameter values).
The value of the CW varies through time as the CW doubles after each
collision up to the maximum CW. The CW is reset to the minimum value
after successful transmission.
In addition, you can configure the TXOP duration for each AC.
ACM
No
Define whether or not admission control mandatory (ACM) is to be
supported on APs configured with this EDCA profile.
Arbitrary Interframe Space
Number
1
Minimum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
2
WMM is an extension to the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol’s Distributed Coordination Function (DCF).
The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic prioritization
depends on the following configurable parameters for each AC:
 arbitrary inter-frame space number (AIFSN)
 minimum and maximum contention window (CW) size
Maximum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
3
Transmission
Opportunity Slots
in 32 usec Units
47
For each AC, the backoff time is the sum of the AIFSN and a random value
between 0 and the CW value. The AC with the lowest backoff time is
granted the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). Frames with the highest
priority AC are more likely to get TXOP as they tend to have the lowest
backoff times (a result of having smaller AIFSN and CW parameter values).
The value of the CW varies through time as the CW doubles after each
collision up to the maximum CW. The CW is reset to the minimum value
after successful transmission.
In addition, you can configure the TXOP duration for each AC.
ACM
No
Define whether or not admission control mandatory (ACM) is to be
supported on APs configured with this EDCA profile.
Video
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited profile appears on the Profiles > SSID > EDCA AP page.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 117
Profiles > SSID > EDCA Station
Wireless Multimedia (WMM) provides media access prioritization through Enhanced Distributed Channel
Access (EDCA). EDCA defines four access categories (ACs) to prioritize traffic: voice, video, best effort,
and background. These ACs correspond to 802.1d priority tags, as shown in Table 45.
Table 47 WMM Access Categories and 802.1d Tags
WMM Access Category
Description
802.1d Tag
Voice
Highest priority
7, 6
Video
Prioritize video traffic above other data traffic
5, 4
Best Effort
Traffic from legacy devices or traffic from applications or
devices that do not support QoS
0, 3
Background
Low priority traffic (file downloads, print jobs)
2, 1
While the WMM ACs designate specific types of traffic, you can determine the priority of the ACs. For
example, you can choose to give video traffic the highest priority. With WMM, applications assign data
packets to an AC. In the client, the data packets are then added to one of the transmit queues for voice,
video, best effort, or background.
WMM is an extension to the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol’s
Distributed Coordination Function (DCF). The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic
prioritization depends on the following configurable parameters for each AC:

arbitrary inter-frame space number (AIFSN)

minimum and maximum contention window (CW) size
For each AC, the backoff time is the sum of the AIFSN and a random value between 0 and the CW value. The
AC with the lowest backoff time is granted the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). Frames with the highest
priority AC are more likely to get TXOP as they tend to have the lowest backoff times (a result of having
smaller AIFSN and CW parameter values). The value of the CW varies through time as the CW doubles after
each collision up to the maximum CW. The CW is reset to the minimum value after successful transmission.
In addition, you can configure the TXOP duration for each AC. On the WLAN switch, you configure the AC
priorities in the WLAN EDCA parameters profile. There are two sets of EDCA profiles you can configure:

AP parameters affect traffic from the AP to the client

STA parameters affect traffic from the client to the AP
Perform these steps to create or edit Event Station profiles.
1. Click Profiles > SSID > EDCA Station in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. This page summarizes the
current cluster profiles.
2. Click the Add button to create a new EDCA Station profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing
profile. The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
118 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 48 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > SSID > EDCA Station Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated.
The drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the
profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Name of the EDCA STA profile.
Arbitrary Interframe Space
Number (1-15)
3
Minimum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
(0-15)
4
WMM is an extension to the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol’s Distributed Coordination Function (DCF).
The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic prioritization depends
on the following configurable parameters for each AC:
 arbitrary inter-frame space number (AIFSN)
 minimum and maximum contention window (CW) size
Maximum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
(1-15)
10
Transmission
Opportunity Slots
in 32 usec Units
0
For each AC, the backoff time is the sum of the AIFSN and a random value
between 0 and the CW value. The AC with the lowest backoff time is granted
the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). Frames with the highest priority AC are
more likely to get TXOP as they tend to have the lowest backoff times (a result
of having smaller AIFSN and CW parameter values). The value of the CW
varies through time as the CW doubles after each collision up to the maximum
CW. The CW is reset to the minimum value after successful transmission.
In addition, you can configure the TXOP duration for each AC.
Arbitrary Interframe Space
Number
7
Minimum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
4
WMM is an extension to the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol’s Distributed Coordination Function (DCF).
The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic prioritization depends
on the following configurable parameters for each AC:
 arbitrary inter-frame space number (AIFSN)
 minimum and maximum contention window (CW) size
Maximum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
10
Transmission
Opportunity Slots
in 32 usec Units
0
General Settings
Best Effort
Background
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
For each AC, the backoff time is the sum of the AIFSN and a random value
between 0 and the CW value. The AC with the lowest backoff time is granted
the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). Frames with the highest priority AC are
more likely to get TXOP as they tend to have the lowest backoff times (a result
of having smaller AIFSN and CW parameter values). The value of the CW
varies through time as the CW doubles after each collision up to the maximum
CW. The CW is reset to the minimum value after successful transmission.
In addition, you can configure the TXOP duration for each AC.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 119
Table 48 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > SSID > EDCA Station Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
ACM
No
Define whether or not admission control mandatory (ACM) is to be supported
on APs configured with this EDCA profile.
Arbitrary Interframe Space
Number
2
Minimum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
3
WMM is an extension to the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol’s Distributed Coordination Function (DCF).
The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic prioritization depends
on the following configurable parameters for each AC:
 arbitrary inter-frame space number (AIFSN)
 minimum and maximum contention window (CW) size
Maximum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
4
Transmission
Opportunity Slots
in 32 usec Units
94
For each AC, the backoff time is the sum of the AIFSN and a random value
between 0 and the CW value. The AC with the lowest backoff time is granted
the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). Frames with the highest priority AC are
more likely to get TXOP as they tend to have the lowest backoff times (a result
of having smaller AIFSN and CW parameter values). The value of the CW
varies through time as the CW doubles after each collision up to the maximum
CW. The CW is reset to the minimum value after successful transmission.
In addition, you can configure the TXOP duration for each AC.
ACM
No
Define whether or not admission control mandatory (ACM) is to be supported
on APs configured with this EDCA profile.
Arbitrary Interframe Space
Number
2
Minimum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
2
WMM is an extension to the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Avoidance (CSMA/CA) protocol’s Distributed Coordination Function (DCF).
The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic prioritization depends
on the following configurable parameters for each AC:
 arbitrary inter-frame space number (AIFSN)
 minimum and maximum contention window (CW) size
Maximum
Contention
Window (Exponent)
3
Transmission
Opportunity Slots
in 32 usec Units
47
For each AC, the backoff time is the sum of the AIFSN and a random value
between 0 and the CW value. The AC with the lowest backoff time is granted
the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). Frames with the highest priority AC are
more likely to get TXOP as they tend to have the lowest backoff times (a result
of having smaller AIFSN and CW parameter values). The value of the CW
varies through time as the CW doubles after each collision up to the maximum
CW. The CW is reset to the minimum value after successful transmission.
In addition, you can configure the TXOP duration for each AC.
ACM
No
Define whether or not admission control mandatory (ACM) is to be supported
on APs configured with this EDCA profile.
Video
Other Settings
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited profile appears on the Profiles > SSID > EDCA Station page.
120 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Profiles > SSID > HT SSID
High-throughput (HT) APs support additional settings not available in legacy APs. A mesh high-throughput
SSID profile can enable or disable high-throughput (802.11n) features and 40 Mhz channel usage, and define
values for aggregated MAC protocol data units (MDPUs) and Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) ranges.
Alcatel-Lucent provides a “default” version of the mesh high-throughput SSID profile. You can use the
“default” version or create a new instance of a profile which you can then edit as you need. High-throughput
Mesh nodes operating in different cluster profiles can share the same high-throughput SSID radio profile.
The mesh high-throughput SSID profile defines settings unique to 802.11n-capable, high-throughput APs. If
none of the APs in your mesh deployment are 802.11n-capable APs, you do not need to configure a highthroughput SSID profile.
If you modify a currently provisioned and running high-throughput SSID profile, your changes take affect
immediately. You do not reboot the WLAN switch or the AP.
Perform these steps to create or edit HT SSID profiles.
1. Click Profiles > SSID > HT SSID in the Alcatel-Lucent Navigation pane. This page summarizes the current
cluster profiles.
2. Click the Add button to create a new HT SSID profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing profile.
The Details page appears. Complete the settings as described in Table 28:
Table 49 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > SSID > HT SSID Profile Settings
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated.
The drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the
profile.
Folders provide a way to organize the visibility of device parameters that is
separate from the configuration groups of devices. Using folders, you can
view basic statistics about device, and define which users have visibility to
which device parameters.
Name
Blank
Name of the HT SSID profile.
High Throughput
Enable (SSID)
Yes
Enable or disable high-throughput (802.11n) features on this SSID. This
parameter is enabled by default.
40 MHz Channel
Usage
Yes
Enable or disable the use of 40 MHz channels. This parameter is enabled by
default.
MPDU
Aggregation
Yes
Enable or disable MAC protocol data unit (MPDU) aggregation.
High-throughput mesh APs are able to send aggregated MAC protocol data
units (MDPUs), which allow an AP to receive a single block acknowledgment
instead of multiple ACK signals. This option, which is enabled by default,
reduces network traffic overhead by effectively eliminating the need to initiate
a new transfer for every MPDU.
Max Transmitted
A-MPCU Size
65535
Set the maximum size of a transmitted aggregate MPDU, in bytes.
Range: 1576 -65535
Max Received AMPDU Size (bytes)
65535
Set the maximum size of a received aggregate MPDU, in bytes. Allowed
values: 8191, 16383, 32767, 65535.
General Settings
Other Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 121
Table 49 Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > SSID > HT SSID Profile Settings (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Min MPDU Start
Spacing (usec)
0
Set the minimum time between the start of adjacent MPDUs within an
aggregate MPDU, in microseconds.
Allowed values: 0 (No restriction on MDPU start spacing), 0.25 usec, 0.5 usec,
1 usec, 2 usec, 4 usec.
Supported MCS
Set
0-15
Set a list of Modulation Coding Scheme (MCS) values or ranges of values to
be supported on this SSID.
The MCS you choose determines the channel width (20MHz vs. 40MHz) and
the number of spatial streams used by the mesh node.
The default value is 1-15; the complete set of supported values. To specify a
smaller range of values, enter a hyphen between the lower and upper values.
To specify a series of different values, separate each value with a comma.
Examples:
 2-10
 1,3,6,9,12
Range: 0-15
Short Guard
Interval in 40 MHz
Mode
Yes
Enable or disable use of short (400ns) guard interval in 40 MHz mode.
A guard interval is a period of time between transmissions that allows
reflections from the previous data transmission to settle before an AP
transmits data again. An AP identifies any signal content received inside this
interval as unwanted inter-symbol interference, and rejects that data.
The 802.11n standard specifies two guard intervals: 400ns (short) and 800ns
(long). Enabling a short guard interval can decrease network overhead by
reducing unnecessary idle time on each AP. Some outdoor deployments, may,
however require a longer guard interval. If the short guard interval does not
allow enough time for reflections to settle in your mesh deployment, intersymbol interference values may increase and degrade throughput.
This parameter is enabled by default.
Legacy Stations
Yes
Allow or disallow associations from legacy (non-HT) stations. By default, this
parameter is enabled (legacy stations are allowed).
Allow Weak
Encryption
No
Use this setting to define TKIP or WEP encryption for unicast traffic, which
forces legacy transmission rates on high-throughput APs. This option is
disabled by default, preventing clients using TKIP or WEP for unicast traffic
from associating with the mesh node
3. Click Add or Save. The added or edited profile appears on the Profiles > SSID > HT SSID page.
122 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Security Pages and Field Descriptions
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration supports user roles, policies, server groups, and additional security
parameters with profiles that are listed in the Security portion of the navigation pane on the Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration page, as illustrated in Figure 39:
Figure 39 Security Components in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
This section describes the profiles, pages, parameters and default settings for all Security components in
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration, as follows:

Security > User Roles



Security > Policies



Security > User Roles > BW Contracts
Security > User Roles > VPN Dialers
Security > Policies > Destinations
Security > Policies > Services
Security > Server Groups






Security > Server Groups > LDAP
Security > Server Groups > RADIUS
Security > Server Groups > TACACS
Security > Server Groups > Internal
Security > Server Groups > XML API
Security > Server Groups > RFC 3576

Security > TACACS Accounting

Security > Time Ranges

Security > User Rules
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 123
Security > User Roles
A client is assigned a user role by one of several methods. A user role assigned by one method may take
precedence over a user role assigned by a different method. The methods of assigning user roles are, from
lowest to highest precedence:
1. The initial user role for unauthenticated clients is configured in the AAA profile for a virtual AP.
2. The user role can be derived from user attributes upon the client’s association with an AP (this is known
as a user-derived role). You can configure rules that assign a user role to clients that match a certain set
of criteria. For example, you can configure a rule to assign the role “VoIP-Phone” to any client that has a
MAC address that starts with bytes xx:yy:zz. User-derivation rules are executed before client
authentication.
3. The user role can be the default user role configured for an authentication method, such as 802.1x or
VPN. For each authentication method, you can configure a default role for clients who are successfully
authenticated using that method.
4. The user role can be derived from attributes returned by the authentication server and certain client
attributes (this is known as a server-derived role). If the client is authenticated via an authentication
server, the user role for the client can be based on one or more attributes returned by the server during
authentication, or on client attributes such as SSID (even if the attribute is not returned by the server).
Server-derivation rules are executed after client authentication.
5. The user role can be derived from Alcatel-Lucent Vendor-Specific Attributes (VSA) for RADIUS server
authentication. A role derived from an Alcatel-Lucent VSA takes precedence over any other user roles.
In the Alcatel-Lucent user-centric network, the user role of a wireless client determines its privileges,
including the priority that every type of traffic to or from the client receives in the wireless network. Thus,
QoS for voice applications is configured when you configure firewall roles and policies.
In an Alcatel-Lucent system, you can configure roles for clients that use mostly data traffic, such as laptop
computers, and roles for clients that use mostly voice traffic, such as VoIP phones. Although there are
different ways for a client to derive a user role, in most cases the clients using data traffic will be assigned a
role after they are authenticated through a method such as 802.1x, VPN, or captive portal. The user role for
VoIP phones can be derived from the OUI of their MAC addresses or the SSID to which they associate. This
user role will typically be configured to have access allowed only for the voice protocol being used (for
example, SIP or SVP).
You must install the Policy Enforcement Firewall license in the WLAN switch.
This page displays the current user roles in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration and where they are used. This
page contains the columns described in Table 50:
Table 50 Security > User Roles Page Contents
Column
Description
Name
Name of the user role.
AAA
Displays the AAA profile or profiles that are referenced by the user role. For additional
information, refer to “Profiles > AAA” on page 57.
Captive Portal Auth
Displays the Captive Portal Auth profiles, if any, that are referenced by the user role. For
additional information, refer to “Profiles > AAA > Captive Portal Auth” on page 58.
802.1X Auth
Displays the 802.1X Auth profiles that are referenced by the user role. For additional
information, refer to “Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth” on page 64.
Stateful 802.1X Auth
Displays the Stateful 802.1X Auth profiles that are referenced by the user role. For
additional information, refer to “Profiles > AAA > Stateful 802.1X Auth” on page 61.
124 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 50 Security > User Roles Page Contents (Continued)
Column
Description
VPN Auth
Displays the VPN Auth profiles that are referenced by the user role. For additional
information, refer to “Profiles > AAA > VPN Auth” on page 62.
Folder
Displays the folder that is associated with this User Role. A Top viewable folder for the
role is able to view all devices and groups contained by the top folder. The top folder and
its subfolders must contain all of the devices in any of the groups it can view.
Clicking any folder name takes you to the APs/Devices > List page for folder inventory
and configuration.
The Security > User Roles > Add New User Role page contains the following fields, as described in Table 51:
Table 51 Security > User Roles > Add New User Role Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the User Role is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the user role.
General Settings
Other Settings
Captive Portal Auth
Downstream
Bandwidth Contract
(Optional) Select the Captive Portal Auth profile, if any, that is to be
referenced by the user role. For additional information, refer to “Profiles >
AAA > Captive Portal Auth” on page 58. Click the add icon to create a new
profile, or click the pencil icon to edit an existing profile.
None
(Optional) You can assign a bandwidth contract to provide an upper limit to
upstream or downstream bandwidth utilized by clients in this role. You can
select the Per User option to apply the bandwidth contracts on a per-user
basis instead of to all clients in the role.
For additional information, refer to “Security > User Roles > BW Contracts”
on page 126.
Downstream Contract
Applies Per User
No
If you selected a DS BW contract in the prior field, this gray field becomes
active. Select Yes or No.
Upstream Bandwidth
Contract
None
(Optional) You can assign a bandwidth contract to provide an upper limit to
upstream or downstream bandwidth utilized by clients in this role. You can
select the Per User option to apply the bandwidth contracts on a per-user
basis instead of to all clients in the role.
For additional information, refer to “Security > User Roles > BW Contracts”
on page 126.
Upstream Contract
Applies Per User
No
If you selected an US BW contract in the prior field, this gray field becomes
active. Select Yes or No.
Maximum Number of
Datapath Sessions
Allowed
None
Use this field to configure a maximum number of sessions per user in this
role. You can configure any value between 0-65535.
Reauthentication
Interval Time
0
(Optional) Set the time, in minutes, after which the client is required to reauthenticate. Enter a value between 0-4096. 0 disables reauthentication.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 125
Table 51 Security > User Roles > Add New User Role Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
ID of VLAN To Be
Assigned
Blank
(Optional) By default, a client is assigned a VLAN on the basis of the
ingress VLAN for the client to the WLAN switch. Use this field to override
this assignment and configure the VLAN ID that is to be assigned to the
user role.
VPN Dialer Profile
None
(Optional) Use this field to assign a VPN dialer to a user role. Select a dialer
from the drop-down list and assign it to the user role. This dialer will be
available for download when a client logs in using captive portal and is
assigned this role.
For additional VPN information, refer to “Security > User Roles > VPN
Dialers” on page 127.
Add New Policy
N/A
Click this button to add a new policy to the user role. The following two
fields appear with respective drop-down menus:
 Policy
 Alcatel-Lucent AP Group
Policy
dhcp-acl
Select the policy to apply to this user role. Once any policy is selected, you
can edit the policy by clicking the pencil icon. You can create a new policy
by clicking the add icon. For additional information, refer to “Security >
Policies” on page 130.
Alcatel-Lucent AP
Group
None
Select the Alcatel-Lucent AP group in which this policy and user role will
apply. For additional information, refer to “General Alcatel-Lucent AP
Groups Procedures and Guidelines” on page 26.
Policies
Click Add to complete the configuration of the User Role, or click Save to complete the editing of an
existing role. The new role appears on the Security > User Roles page.
Security > User Roles > BW Contracts
You can manage bandwidth utilization by assigning maximum bandwidth rates, or bandwidth contracts, to
user roles. You can configure bandwidth contracts, in kilobits per second (Kbps) or megabits per second
(Mbps), for the following types of traffic:

from the client to the WLAN switch (“upstream” traffic)

from the WLAN switch to the client (“downstream” traffic)
You can assign different bandwidth contracts to upstream and downstream traffic for the same user role.
You can also assign a bandwidth contract for only upstream or only downstream traffic for a user role; if
there is no bandwidth contract specified for a traffic direction, unlimited bandwidth is allowed.
By default, all users that belong to the same role share a configured bandwidth rate for upstream or
downstream traffic. You can optionally apply a bandwidth contract on a per-user basis; each user who
belongs to the role is allowed the configured bandwidth rate. For example, if clients are connected to the
WLAN switch through a DSL line, you may want to restrict the upstream bandwidth rate allowed for each
user to 128 Kbps. Or, you can limit the total downstream bandwidth used by all users in the ‘guest’ role in
Mbps.
The Details page for Security > User Roles > Add New Bandwidth Contract page contains the following fields,
as described in Table 52:
126 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 52 Security > User Roles > Add New BW Contract Page Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the Bandwidth
Contract is associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available
for association with the profile.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Units
kbits
Configure bandwidth contracts, in kilobits per second (Kbps) or megabits
per second (Mbps), for the following types of traffic:
 from the client to the WLAN switch (“upstream” traffic)
 from the WLAN switch to the client (“downstream” traffic)
Bandwidth
N/A
Specify whether this bandwidth contract is upstream or downstream by
typing one of the following terms in lower case:
 upstream
General Settings
Other Settings

downstream
Click Add to finish the new BW Contract and to return to the BW Contract
page. The new contact appears below the Add New BW Contract button.
Click Add to complete the configuration of the BW Contract profile, or click Save to complete the editing of
an existing profile. The new BW contract appears on the Security > User Roles page.
Security > User Roles > VPN Dialers
The VPN dialer can be downloaded using Captive Portal. For the user role assigned through Captive Portal,
configure the dialer by the name used to identify the dialer. For example, if the captive portal client is
assigned the guest role after logging on through captive portal and the dialer is called mydialer, configure
mydialer as the dialer to be used in the guest role.
Select a dialer from the drop-down list and assign it to the user role. This dialer will be available for
download when a client logs in using captive portal and is assigned this role.
The Security > User Roles > Add New VPN Dialer page contains the following fields, as described in Table 53:
Table 53 Security > User Roles > Add VPN Dialer Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the VPN Dialer is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
General Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 127
Table 53 Security > User Roles > Add VPN Dialer Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
No
Enable PPTP with this setting as desired.
Other Settings
Enable PPTP
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is an alternative to L2TP/IPSec.
Like L2TP/IPSec, PPTP provides a logical transport mechanism to send PPP
frames as well as tunneling or encapsulation so that the PPP frames can be
sent across an IP network. PPTP relies on the PPP connection process to
perform user authentication and protocol configuration.
With PPTP, data encryption begins after PPP authentication and connection
process is completed. PPTP connections use Microsoft Point-to-Point
Encryption (MPPE), which uses the Rivest-Shamir-Aldeman (RSA) RC-4
encryption algorithm. PPTP connections require user-level authentication
through a PPP-based authentication protocol (MSCHAPv2) is the currentlysupported method).
Enable L2TP
Yes
Enable L2TP with this setting as desired.
The combination of Layer-2 Tunneling Protocol and Internet Protocol
Security (L2TP/IPSec) is a highly secure technology that enables VPN
connections across public networks such as the Internet. L2TP/IPSec
provides both a logical transport mechanism on which to transmit PPP
frames as well as tunneling or encapsulation so that the PPP frames can be
sent across an IP network. L2TP/IPSec relies on the PPP connection process
to perform user authentication and protocol configuration. With L2TP/IPSec,
the user authentication process is encrypted using the Data Encryption
Standard (DES) or Triple DES (3DES) algorithm.
L2TP/IPSec requires two levels of authentication:
 Computer-level authentication with a preshared key to create the IPSec
security associations (SAs) to protect the L2TP-encapsulated data.
 User-level authentication through a PPP-based authentication protocol
using passwords, SecureID, digital certificates, or smart cards after
successful creation of the SAs.
Send traffic to the
direct network in
clear
No
Use this setting if no encryption is to be used and packets passing between
the wireless client and WLAN switch are to be in clear text.
Disable wireless
devices when
client is wired
No
Use this setting to disable wireless clients when a wired device is known to
be on the VPN.
Enable SecurID
New and Next Pin
Mode
No
Use this setting to enable or disable SecurID PIN modes.
The SecurID authentication scheme authenticates the user on a RSA ACE/
Server. When challenged, the user has to enter a password that is a
combination of two numbers: a personal identification number (PIN),
supplied by RSA, combined with a token code, which is the number
displayed on the RSA SecurID authenticator.
New PIN mode is applied in cases where the authentication process requires
additional verification of the PIN. In this case, the user is required to use a
new PIN. The new PIN is derived from one of the following two sources,
depending on the configuration of the RSA ACE/Server:
 The user is prompted to select and enter a new PIN.
 The server supplies the user with a new PIN.
The user is then required to re-authenticate with the new PIN. The use of the
New PIN mode is optional and can be enabled or disabled.
128 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 53 Security > User Roles > Add VPN Dialer Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
PPP
Authentication
Modes
CHAP
MSCHAP
MSCHAPv2
PAP
Use this section to select the authentication modes to be supported for PPP
in the VPN. The following options are available:
 CHAP
 Cache SecurID Token
 MSCHAP
 MSCHAPv2
 PAP
IKE Lifetime
(300-85400 secs)
28800
Specify the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) Lifetime in seconds. When this
period of time expires, the IKE SA is replaced by a new SA or is terminated.
The IKE SA specifies values for the IKE exchange: the authentication method
used, the encryption and hash algorithms, the Diffie-Hellman group used, the
lifetime of the IKE SA in seconds, and the shared secret key values for the
encryption algorithms. The IKE SA in each peer is bi-directional.
IKE Encryption
168-bit
3DES-CBC
Select the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) encryption method from the following
two options:
 168-bit 3DES-CBC
 56-bit DES-CBC
IKE Diffie-Hellman
Group
1024-bit (1)
Select the IPSEC Mode Group that matches the Diffie Hellman Group
configured for the IPSEC policy. The two options are as follows:
 1024-bit
 768-bit
The IKE policy selections, along with the preshared key, need to be reflected
in the VPN configuration. Set the VPN configuration on clients to match the
choices made above. In case the Alcatel-Lucent dialer is used, these
configuration need to be made on the dialer prior to downloading the dialer
onto the local client.
IKE Hash
Algorithm
SHA
Set the IKE Hash Algorithm to either SHA or MD5, to match the IKE policy for
IPSEC.
IKE Authentication
Pre-Shared
IKE Phase 1 authentication can be done with either an IKE preshared key or
digital certificates. This establishes how the client is authenticated with the
internal database on the WLAN switch.
The options are Pre-Shared Keys or RSA Signatures.
IPSEC Lifetime
7200
Define the IPSEC lifetime in seconds, after which a new IPSEC key is
required.
IPSEC Diffie
Hellman Group
1024-bit (1)
Select the IPSEC Mode Group that matches the Diffie Hellman Group
configured for the IKE policy. The two options are as follows:
 1024-bit
 768-bit
The IPSEC policy selections, along with the preshared key, need to be
reflected in the VPN configuration. Set the VPN configuration on clients to
match the choices made above. In case the Alcatel-Lucent dialer is used,
these configuration need to be made on the dialer prior to downloading the
dialer onto the local client.
IPSEC Encryption
168-bit 3DES
Specify the type of IPSEC encryption to support for the VPN. Options are as
follows:
 Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) with 168-bit 3DES
 ESP with 56-bit DES
IPSEC Hash
Algorithm
SHA
Set the IKE Hash Algorithm to either SHA or MD5, to match the IKE policy for
IKE Hash Algorithm.
Click Add to finish the new VPN Dialers profile, or click Save to complete the editing of an existing profile.
You return to the VPN Dialers page. The new profile appears below the Add New VPN Dialer button.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 129
Security > Policies
The Security > Policies page displays all currently configured policies, to include the policy name, type, and
cites the groups, user roles, and folders to which the security policy applies. To create a new policy, click
the Add New Policy button. To edit an existing policy, click the pencil icon.
The Security > Policy > Add New Policy page contains the following fields, as described in Table 54:
Table 54 Security > Policy > Add New Policy Field Descriptions
Field
Description
General Settings
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the policy is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the policy.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the policy.
IPv4 Session
Specify the type of policy. The options are as follows:
Other Settings
Policy Type


IPv4
IPv6
Click Add to complete the configuration of the Policies profile. The new policy appears on the Security >
Policies > Policies page.
Security > Policies > Destinations
The Security > Policies > Destinations page lists the destination names currently configured, with the Policy
that uses the destination and the folder. To create a new destination to be referenced by a security policy,
click the Add New Net Destination button. To edit an existing policy, click the pencil icon.
The Security > Policies > Add New Destinations page contains the following fields, as described in Table 55:
Table 55 Security > Policies > Net Destinations Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the security
policy is associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders
available for association with the policy.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the destination.
Invert
No
Use this field to invert the destination from one end of the VPN
connection to the other.
Add New Net
Destination Rule
N/A
Click this button to create a new rule for this destination profile.
Clicking this button displays the Net Destination Rule section,
which is comprised of two settings:
 Rule Type—Specify whether the rule applies to Host,
Network, or Range.
 IP Address—Enter the IP address for the net destination rule.
General Settings
Other Settings
Click Add to complete the configuration of the Destination policy profile, or click Save to complete the
editing of an existing server. The new destination appears on the Security > Policies > Destinations page.
130 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Security > Policies > Services
The Security > Policies > Services page displays all Netservice profiles that are available for reference by
Security policies. This page displays Netservice profile names, the protocol associated with it, the policy
that uses this Netservice profile, and the folder.
Click Add to create a new Netservice profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing Netservice profile
to edit it. The Security > Policies > Services page contains the following fields, as described in Table 56:
Table 56 Security > Policies > Services Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the security
policy service is associated. The drop-down menu displays all
folders available for association with the service.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the destination.
Protocol
TCP
Specify the protocol that is to support the security policy service
being configured. The service options are as follows:
 TCP
 UDP
 IP
The remaining fields on this page change according to which
protocol you have selected.
TCP/UDP Port
N/A
Specify the TCP/UDP port or range of ports to support the
service being configured.
TCP/UDP Max Port
N/A
Specify the highest port that will support the TCP/UDP service
being configured.
IP Protocol Number
(0-255)
N/A
Specify the numeric identifier of the upper layer IP protocol that
an IP packet should use.
Configure Application
Level Gateway
No
Specify whether to create an application level gateway, which
filters incoming and outgoing information packets before copying
and forwarding across the gateway. If you select Yes in this field,
you are prompted with a new drop-down menu in which to select
the Application Level Gateway type.
Application Level
Gateway
dhcp
If you select Yes for Configure Application Level Gateway, then
specify the gateway type from this drop-down menu. The
following application level gateway types are supported:
 dhcp
 dns
 ftp
 h323
 noe
 rtsp
 sccp
 sip
 sips
 svp
 tftp
 vocera
General Settings
Other Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 131
Security > Server Groups
Server Groups Page Overview
The Server > Server Groups page displays all server groups currently configured, and the profiles and
folders that are used by each server group, to include the following:

AAA

Captive Portal Auth

Management Auth

Stateful 802.1X Auth

TACACS Accounting

VPN Auth

Folder
The list of servers in a server group is an ordered list. By default, the first server in the list is always used
unless it is unavailable, in which case the next server in the list is used. You can configure the order of
servers in the server group. In the WebUI, use the up or down arrows to order the servers (the top server is
the first server in the list). In the CLI, use the position parameter to specify the relative order of servers in
the list (the lowest value denotes the first server in the list).
The first available server in the list is used for authentication. If the server responds with an authentication
failure, there is no further processing for the user or client for which the authentication request failed. You
can optionally enable fail-through authentication for the server group so that if the first server in the list
returns an authentication deny, the WLAN switch attempts authentication with the next server in the
ordered list. The WLAN switch attempts authentication with each server in the list until either there is a
successful authentication or the list of servers in the group is exhausted. This feature is useful in
environments where there are multiple, independent authentication servers; users may fail authentication
on one server but can be authenticated on another server.
Before enabling fail-through authentication, note the following:

This feature is not supported for 802.1x authentication with a server group that consists of external EAP
compliant RADIUS servers. You can, however, use fail-through authentication when the 802.1x
authentication is terminated on the WLAN switch (AAA FastConnect).

Enabling this feature for a large server group list may cause excess processing load on the WLAN switch.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you use server selection based on domain matching whenever possible.

Certain servers, such as the RSA RADIUS server, lock out the WLAN switch if there are multiple
authentication failures. Therefore you should not enable fail-through authentication with these servers.
When fail-through authentication is enabled, users that fail authentication on the first server in the server
list should be authenticated with the second server.
Supported Servers
AOS-W supports the following external authentication servers:



RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service)
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)
TACACS+ (Terminal Access WLAN switch Access Control System)
Additionally, you can use the WLAN switch’s internal database to authenticate users. You create entries in
the database for users and their passwords and default role.
You can create groups of servers for specific types of authentication. For example, you can specify one or
more RADIUS servers to be used for 802.1x authentication. The list of servers in a server group is an
ordered list. This means that the first server in the list is always used unless it is unavailable, in which case
the next server in the list is used. You can configure servers of different types in one group — for example,
you can include the internal database as a backup to a RADIUS server.
Server names are unique. You can configure the same server in multiple server groups. You must configure
the server before you can add it to a server group.
132 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Adding a New Server Group
The server group is assigned to the server group for 802.1x authentication.
To create a new server group, click the Add button, or to edit an existing group, click the pencil icon next to
that group. The Add New Server Group page appears, and contains the following fields, as described in
Table 57:
Table 57 Security > Server Groups > Add or Edit Server Group Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the server is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the server group.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the server group.
No
Enable or disable a fail through server.
General Settings
Other Settings
Fail Through
When fail-through authentication is enabled, users that fail authentication on
the first server in the server list should be authenticated with the second
server. The WLAN switch attempts authentication with each server in the list
until either there is a successful authentication or the list of servers in the
group is exhausted.
This feature is useful in environments where there are multiple, independent
authentication servers; users may fail authentication on one server but can
be authenticated on another server.
Add New Server
N/A
Click this button to add a new server to the Server Group being configured.
A new Server section and Server Group Server Rules section appear with
the following settings to be defined:
Server Section
 Trim FQDN—Default setting is No. Change to Yes to enable.
You can use the “match FQDN” option for a server match rule. With a
match FQDN rule, the server is selected if the <domain> portion of the
user information in the formats <domain>\<user> or <user>@<domain>
exactly matches a specified string. Note the following caveats when
using a match FQDN rule:
 This rule does not support client information in the host/<pcname>.<domain> format, so it is not useful for 802.1x machine
authentication.
 The match FQDN option performs matches on only the <domain>
portion of the user information sent in an authentication request. The
match-authstring option (described previously) allows you to match all
or a portion of the user information sent in an authentication request.
 Server Type—Select the server type for the new server being added.
Options are RADIUS (default), LDAP, TACACS, and Internal.
 RADIUS Server—Select the RADIUS server from the drop-down menu
that the new server is to use. You can edit an existing RADIUS server or
create a new server.
Server Group Server Rules Section
Click the Add button to add a new rules section. The page that appears
contains the following settings to define:
 Match Type—From the drop-down menu, select Authstring or FQDN.
The following settings complete the configuration.
 Operator—For Authstring only, specify how to process the string
(contains, equals, starts with).
 Match String—Enter the string or string fragment.
Finish by clicking the Add New Server Group Server Rules button.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 133
Table 57 Security > Server Groups > Add or Edit Server Group Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Field to set
role
Specify whether the server group rule is a role or a VLAN. The Role/VLAN
field at the bottom of the page changes in response to your selection here.
Attribute
ARAPFeatures
From the drop-down menu, click the attribute that defines the server group
rule being configured. Many options are supported.
Operation
contains
Select the criteria by which to process the Operand, which you specify in the
following field.
Operand
N/A
Enter a text string.
Role/VLAN
ap-role
Select the role or VLAN to associate with this new server group rule from the
drop-down menu.
Server Group Rule
Click Add to complete the configuration of the Server Group, or click Save to complete the editing of an
existing server. The new server group appears on the Security > Server Groups page.
Security > Server Groups > LDAP
You can configure Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) servers for use by a server group.
The Security > Server Groups > LDAP page displays current LDAP servers available for inclusion in server
groups. Click Add to create a new LDAP server, or click the pencil icon next to an existing LDAP server to
edit the configuration.
The Security > Server Groups > Add LDAP Server page contains the following fields, as described in Table 58:
Table 58 Security > Server Groups > Add LDAP Server Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the server is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the server group.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the server.
Host IP Address
0.0.0.0
Enter the IP address of the LDAP server.
Admin-DN
N/A
Enter the distinguished name for the admin user who has read/
search privileges across all the entries in the LDAP database. The
user need not have write privileges but the user should be able to
search the database, and read attributes of other users in the
database.
Admin Password
N/A
Enter the password for the admin user.
Allow Clear-text
No
Enable this setting to allows clear-text (unencrypted)
communication with the LDAP server.
Auth Port
389
Enter the port number used for authentication on the LDAP
server.
General Settings
Other Settings
134 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 58 Security > Server Groups > Add LDAP Server Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Base-DN
N/A
Enter the distinguished name of the node which contains the
entire user database to use.
Filter
(objectclass=*)
Select the filter that should be applied to any search of the user in
the LDAP database.
Key Attribute
sAMAccountName
Enter the attribute that should be used as a key in search for the
LDAP server. For Active Directory, the value is sAMAccountName.
Timeout (1030 sec)
20
Define the timeout period of a LDAP request, in seconds.
Enable
Yes
Use this field to enable or disable the LDAP server being
configured. You can configure the LDAP server as disabled, but
return later to enable it.
Preferred Connection
Type
ldap-s
Select the connection type for the LDAP server from the dropdown menu. LDAP servers support the following connection
types:
 clear-text—No encryption is used.
 ldap-s—Uses SSL encryption.
 start-tls—Uses TLS encryption.
Click Add to complete the configuration of the LDAP Server, or click Save to complete the editing of an
existing server. The new LDAP server appears on the Security > Server Groups > LDAP Server page. This
server is now available to be used by server groups.
Security > Server Groups > RADIUS
You can configure RADIUS servers for use by a server group. The Security > Server Groups > RADIUS page
displays current RADIUS servers available for inclusion in server groups. Click Add to create a new
RADIUS server, or click the pencil icon next to an existing RADIUS server to edit the configuration.
The Security > Server Groups > Add New RADIUS Server page contains the following fields, as described in
Table 59:
Table 59 Security > Server Groups > RADIUS
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the server is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the server group.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the server.
Host IP Address
N/A
Set the IP address of the authentication server.
Key (Confirm Key)
N/A
Set the shared secret between the WLAN switch and the
authentication server. The maximum length is 48 bytes.
Auth Port
1812
Set the authentication port on the server.
General Settings
Other Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 135
Table 59 Security > Server Groups > RADIUS (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Acct Port
1813
Set the accounting port on the server.
Retransmits (0-3)
3
Set the Maximum number of retries sent to the server by the WLAN
switch before the server is marked as down.
Timeout
(1-30 sec)
Set the maximum time, in seconds, that the WLAN switch waits
before timing out the request and resending it.
NAS ID
N/A
Set the Network Access Server (NAS) identifier to use in RADIUS
packets.
NAS IP
N/A
Set the NAS IP address to send in RADIUS packets.
You can configure a “global” NAS IP address that the WLAN switch
uses for communications with all RADIUS servers. If you do not
configure a server-specific NAS IP, the global NAS IP is used.
Use MD5
No
Enable or disable the use of MD5 hashing for cleartext passwords.
Enable
Yes
Enable or disable the RADIUS server.
Click Add to complete the configuration of the RADIUS server, or click Save to complete the editing of an
existing server. The new server appears on the Security > Server Groups > RADIUS page. This server is now
available to be used by server groups.
Security > Server Groups > TACACS
You can configure TACACS servers for use by a server group. The Security > Server Groups > TACACS page
displays current TACACS servers available for inclusion in server groups. Click Add to create a new
RADIUS server, or click the pencil icon next to an existing TACACS server to edit the configuration.
The Security > Server Groups > Add New TACACS Server page contains the following fields, as described in
Table 60:
Table 60 Security > Server Groups > TACACS
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the server is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the server group.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the server.
General Settings
Other Settings
Host IP Address
0.0.0.0
Key (Confirm Key)
N/A
Set the shared secret to authenticate communication between
the TACACS+ client and server.
TCP Port
49
Set the TCP port to be used by the server.
Retransmits (0-3)
3
Set the maximum number of times a request is retried.
136 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 60 Security > Server Groups > TACACS (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Tmeout (1-30 sec)
20
Set the timeout period for TACACS+ requests, in seconds.
Enable
Yes
Enable or disable the TACACS server.
Click Add to complete the configuration of the TACACS Server, or click Save to complete the editing of an
existing server. The new server appears on the Security > Server Groups > TACACS page. This server is now
available to be used by server groups.
Security > Server Groups > Internal
An internal server group configures the internal database with the username, password, and role (student,
faculty, or sysadmin) for each user. There is a default internal server group that includes the internal
database. For the internal server group, configure a server derivation rule that assigns the role to the
authenticated client.
The Security > Server Groups > Add New Internal Server page contains the following fields, as described in
Table 61:
Table 61 Security > Server Groups > Add Internal Server Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the server is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the server group.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the server.
N/A
Set the maximum expiration time (in minutes) for guest accounts.
If the guest-provisioning user attempt to add a guest account that
expires beyond this time period, an error message is displayed
and the guest account is created with the maximum time you
configured.
N/A
This section displays internal server users currently configured for
use on the Internal Server.
Click this button to add a new user. The Internal Server User
section appears with the following settings.
User Name
N/A
Enter the name of a user, or click Generate to create an
anonymous ID for this user.
Password
N/A
Enter the password in plain text, or click Generate to create a
random password for this user.
General Settings
Other Settings
Maximum Expiration
(mins)
Internal Server Users
Add New Internal
Server User
Internal Server User
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 137
Table 61 Security > Server Groups > Add Internal Server Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
User Role
guest
From the drop-down menu, select the user role to associate with
this user. The role establishes read/write privileges, manage/
monitor privileges, and other settings.
E-Mail
N/A
Enter the email address of the guest user.
Enabled
Yes
Specify whether this guest user is enabled or disabled on the
internal server.
Expire User
No
Specify whether to expire the guest user after a period of time. If
you click Yes, a new field appears with instructions about the
date and time in which the guest user is expired from the internal
server.
Click Add to complete the configuration of the Internal Server, or click Save to complete the editing of an
existing server. The new server appears on the Security > Server Groups > Internal Server page. This server
is now available to be used by server groups.
Security > Server Groups > XML API
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration supports server groups that can include XML API servers. XML API servers
send and accept requests for information. XML API servers process such requests and act on these requests
by performing requested actions. Such a server also compiles necessary reporting data and sends it back to
requesting source.
The Security > Server Groups > Server page lists any XML API servers currently available for use by server
groups. From this page, click Add to create a new XML API server, or click the pencil icon next to an
existing server to edit. The Security > Server Groups > Add New XML API Server page contains the following
fields, as described in Table 62:
Table 62 Security > Server Groups > Add New XML API Server Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the server is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the server group.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the server.
Blank
Set the shared secret to authenticate communication between
the XML API client and server.
General Settings
Other Settings
Key (Confirm Key)
Click Add to complete the configuration of the XML API Server, or click Save to complete the editing of an
existing server. The new server appears on the Security > Server Groups > XML API page. This server is now
available to be used by server groups.
138 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Security > Server Groups > RFC 3576
RFC 3576 servers support dynamic authorization extensions to Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS). Alcatel-Lucent Configuration supports RFC 3576 servers that can be referenced by server
groups.
To view currently configured RFC 3576 servers and where they are used, navigate to the Security > Server
Groups > RFC3576 page.
Click Add to create a new RFC3576 server, or click the pencil icon next to an existing server to edit it. The
Security > Server Groups > Add RFC 3576 Server page contains the following fields, as described in Table 63.
Table 63 Security > Server Groups > Add RFC 3576 Server Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the server is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the server group.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the server.
Blank
Set the shared secret to authenticate communication between
the RFC 3576 client and server.
General Settings
Other Settings
Key (Confirm Key)
Click Add to complete the configuration of the RFC 3576 Server, or click Save to complete the editing of an
existing server. The new server appears on the Security > Server Groups > RFC 3576 page. This server is
now available to be used by server groups.
Security > TACACS Accounting
TACACS+ accounting allows commands issued on the WLAN switch to be reported to TACACS+ servers.
You can specify the types of commands that are reported, and these are action, configuration, or show
commands. You can have all commands reported as desired. Alcatel-Lucent Configuration supports
TACACS Accounting servers that can be referenced by server groups.
To view currently configured TACACS Accounting profiles and where they are used, navigate to the
Security > TACACS Accounting page. Click Add to create a new TACACS Accounting profile, or click the
pencil icon to edit an existing profile.
The Add/Edit TACACS Accounting Profile page contains the following fields, as described in Table 64:
Table 64 Security > Server Groups > Add/Edit TACACS Accounting Profile Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
General Settings
Other Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 139
Table 64 Security > Server Groups > Add/Edit TACACS Accounting Profile Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Enabled
No
Enable or disable the TACACS Accounting profile. If enabled,
additional field appear, in which to define additional parameters,
as follows.
Server Group
default
From the drop-down menu, select the server group that is to
reference the TACACS Accounting profile. You can create a new
group by clicking the add icon, or edit an existing group by
clicking the pencil icon. once you are done adding or editing, the
OV3600 interface returns you to the TACACS Accounting Profile
page to complete the configuration.
Action
No
Select this option to have Action commands monitored and
reported by the TACACS Accounting profile.
Configuration
No
Select this option to have Configuration commands
monitored and reported by the TACACS Accounting profile.
Show
No
Select this option to have Show commands monitored and
reported by the TACACS Accounting profile.
Click Add to complete the new TACACS Accounting profile, or click Save to complete the editing of an
existing profile.
Security > Time Ranges
A time range profile establishes the boundaries by which users and guest users are to be supported on the
network. This is a security and access-related profile, and several time range profiles can be configured to
enable absolute or periodic access.
The Security > Time Ranges page displays all time ranges that are currently available in Alcatel-Lucent
Configuration, time range profile type, the policy and WLAN that use time range profiles, and the folder in
which each profile is visible.
To create a new time range profile, click the Add New Time Range button, or click the pencil icon next to an
existing time range profile to adjust settings. The Security > Time Range > Add/Edit New Time Range page
contains the following fields, as described in Table 65:
Table 65 Security > Time Range > Add/Edit Time Range Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
General Settings
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is associated. The
drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the profile.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
Other Settings
140 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 65 Security > Time Range > Add/Edit Time Range Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Type
Absolute
Specify whether the time range is Absolute, meaning a very specific range of time,
or Periodic, meaning regularly occurring time ranges that occur repeatedly over
time.
If you select Absolutely, specify the Start Date and End Date and time as
instructed.
If you select Periodic, the Add New Time Period button appears. Click this button,
then complete the three settings that follow:
 Period—Specify whether the time period is daily, weekday, weekend, or day.
 Start Time—Specify the hour and minute that the time period is to be begin.
 End Time—Specify the hour and minute that the time period is to end.
Click Add to complete the Time Period profile, or click Save to complete the editing of an existing profile.
Security > User Rules
The user role is a user derivation profile. User Rules can be derived from attributes from the client’s
association with an AP. For VoIP phones, you can configure the devices to be placed in their user role based
on the SSID or the Organizational Unit Identifier (OUI) of the client’s MAC address.
Navigate to the Security > User Rules page in the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane. This page
displays user rules that are currently configured, the AAA profile that references these rules, and the folder.
To add a new user rule, which is a derivation profile, click Add New User Derivation Profile. To edit an
existing user rule, click the pencil icon next to an existing rule. The Details page appears. Table 66 describes
the contents of this page.
Table 66 Security > User Rules > Add/Edit User Rules Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the rule set
is associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available
for association with the rule set.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the rule set.
Add New User
Derivation Rule
N/A
Click this button to create a new rule. Additional fields appear
that require configuration, as follows.
Set Type
role
Select whether the rule is based on role or VLAN.
General Settings
User Derivation Rules
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 141
Table 66 Security > User Rules > Add/Edit User Rules Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Rule Type
bssid
Select one of the following options from the drop-down menu.
Your selection in this field changes an ensuing field that must be
completed, as follows:
 bssid—Selecting this option displays the BSSID field below.
Specify the BSSID in text.
 dhcp-option-77—Selecting this option displays the DHCP
Option 77 field below. Enter this information in text.
 encryption-type—Selecting this option displays the
Encryption Type field below, in which you must select the
encryption type from the drop-down menu. Select open,
static-wep, or another other encryption type from the dropdown menu.
 essid—Selecting this option displays ESSID field below, in
which you enter the ESSID in text.
 location—Selecting this option displays the Location field
below, in which you enter the location in text.
 macaddr—Selecting this option displays the MAC Address
field below, in which you must enter the MAC address.
Operator
contains
Select the matching operator.
User Role/VLAN
ap-role
If you selected role for the Set Type field above, then select the
specific user role from this drop-down menu.
If you selected VLAN for the Set Type field above, then select the
specific VLAN from this drop-down menu.
142 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Advanced Services Pages and Field Descriptions
This document section describes the contents, parameters, and default settings for all Advanced Services
components in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration. Alcatel-Lucent Configuration in OV3600 6.3 supports advanced
services such as IP Mobility and VPN services. Future OV3600 versions will support additional advanced
services.
For additional information about IP Mobility domains, VPN services, and additional architecture or
concepts, refer to your version of the AOS-W User Guide.
Overview of IP Mobility Domains
Alcatel-Lucent’s layer-3 mobility solution is based on the Mobile IP protocol standard, as described in RFC
3344, “IP Mobility Support for IPv4”. This standard addresses users who need both network connectivity
and mobility within the work environment.
Unlike other layer-3 mobility solutions, an Alcatel-Lucent mobility solution does not require that you install
mobility software or perform additional configuration on wireless clients. The OmniAccess WLAN switches
perform all functions that enable clients to roam within the mobility domain.
In a mobility domain, a mobile client is a wireless client that can change its point of attachment from one
network to another within the domain. A mobile client receives an IP address (a home address) on a home
network. A mobile client can detach at any time from its home network and reconnect to a foreign network
(any network other than the mobile client’s home network) within the mobility domain. When a mobile
client is connected to a foreign network, it is bound to a care-of address that reflects its current point of
attachment. A care-of address is the IP address of the Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch in the foreign network
with which the mobile client is associated.
The home agent for the client is the WLAN switch where the client appears for the first time when it joins
the mobility domain. The home agent is the single point of contact for the client when the client roams. The
foreign agent for the client is the WLAN switch which handles all Mobile IP communication with the home
agent on behalf of the client. Traffic sent to a client’s home address is intercepted by the home agent and
tunneled for delivery to the client on the foreign network. On the foreign network, the foreign agent delivers
the tunneled data to the mobile client.
A mobility domain is a group of OmniAccess WLAN switches among which a wireless user can roam
without losing their IP address. Mobility domains are not tied with the master WLAN switch, thus it is
possible for a user to roam between WLAN switches managed by different master WLAN switches as long
as all of the WLAN switches belong to the same mobility domain.
You enable and configure mobility domains only on OmniAccess WLAN switches. No additional software or
configuration is required on wireless clients to allow roaming within the domain.
Before configuring a mobility domain, you should determine the user VLAN(s) for which mobility is
required. For example, you may want to allow employees to be able to roam from one subnetwork to
another. All WLAN switches that support the VLANs into which employee users can be placed should be
part of the same mobility domain.
A WLAN switch can be part of multiple mobility domains, although Alcatel-Lucent recommends that a
WLAN switch belong to only one domain. The WLAN switches in a mobility domain do not need to be
managed by the same master WLAN switch.
You configure a mobility domain on a master WLAN switch; the mobility domain information is pushed to
all local WLAN switches that are managed by the same master WLAN switch. On each WLAN switch, you
must specify the active domain (the domain to which the WLAN switch belongs). If you do not specify the
active domain, the WLAN switch will be assigned to a predefined “default” domain.
Although you configure a mobility domain on a master WLAN switch, the master WLAN switch does not
need to be a member of the mobility domain. For example, you could set up a mobility domain that contains
only local WLAN switches; you still need to configure the mobility domain on the master WLAN switch that
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 143
manages the local WLAN switches. You can also configure a mobility domain that contains multiple master
WLAN switches; you need to configure the mobility domain on each master WLAN switch.
Table 67 WLAN switches in a Mobility Domain
On a master WLAN switch:

On all WLAN switches in the mobility domain:
Configure the mobility domain, including the entries
in the home agent table (HAT).


Enable mobility (disabled by default).
Join a specified mobility domain (not required for
“default” mobility domain).
You can enable or disable IP mobility in a virtual AP profile (IP mobility is enabled by default). When IP
mobility is enabled in a virtual AP profile, the ESSID that is configured for the virtual AP supports layer-3
mobility. If you disable IP mobility for a virtual AP, any clients that associate to the virtual AP will not have
mobility service.
Advanced Services > IP Mobility
Navigate to Advanced Services > IP Mobility page from the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation pane.
This page displays all currently configured profiles supporting IP Mobility, each group that uses each IP
Mobility profile, and the folder for each IP Mobility profile.
Click Add to create a new IP Mobility profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to modify
settings on an existing profile. The Advanced Services > IP Mobility Profile Details page contains the
following fields, as described in Table 68:
Table 68 Advanced Services > IP Mobility, Add/Edit Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the profile.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the profile.
None
selected
This section displays all domains that are available for association with
this IP mobility profile. You can show all, or show only selected domains.
Select one or more mobility domains to associate with this IP Mobility
profile.
Registration Lifetime
Requested by Proxy
(10-65,534 sec)
180
Specify the client registration time on the foreign network.
A foreign agent receives traffic that is intercepted by the home agent on
the home network, and forwards to the client on the foreign network.
This setting defines the registration time of a client on the foreign
network.
Maximum Number of
Active Visitors (0-5000)
5000
Set the maximum number of users to be supported by the foreign
network.
Maximum Number of
Requests Retransmits
(0-5)
3
Set the maximum number of times that a retransmit is to be supported
on the foreign network by proxy.
General Settings
Mobility Domains
Mobility Domains
Foreign Agent
144 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 68 Advanced Services > IP Mobility, Add/Edit Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Retransmit Interval
(100-10000 msec)
1000
Set the foreign agent retransmit time in milliseconds. The retransmit
interval defines retransmission between the home agent and the foreign
agent.
Replay Protection Time
Value (0-300 sec)
7
Define the time period over which message replay is to be detected.
Message replay detects if a message that is intended for a client has
been intercepted and replayed. This setting defines how long replay
detection is to monitor for replay.
Maximum Number of
Active Bindings
(0-5000)
5000
Define the maximum number of bindings in which the home agent
network is to support a client when the client is out of range of the
network, or otherwise disconnected.
Trigger Mobility on
Station Association
Yes
Enable this setting to trigger client mobility processing on the network
once a client has associated to the network in mobile fashion.
The proxy mobile IP module in a mobility-enabled WLAN switch detects
when a mobile client has moved to a foreign network and determines the
home agent for a roaming client. The proxy mobile IP module performs
the following functions:
 Derives the address of the home agent for a mobile client from the
HAT using the mobile client’s IP address. If there is more than one
possible home agent for a mobile client in the HAT, the proxy mobile
IP module uses a discovery mechanism to find the current home
agent for the client.
 Detects when a mobile client has moved. Client moves are detected
based on ingress port and VLAN changes and mobility is triggered
accordingly. For faster roaming convergence between AP(s) on the
same WLAN switch, it is recommended that you keep the “on
station association” option enabled. This helps trigger mobility as
soon as 802.11 association packets are received from the mobile
client.
Enable Support for
Standalone APs
No
Select this option to support standalone APs on the IP Mobility domain.
Log User Moves
Yes
Enable this option to log client movement in the IP Mobility domain. This
setting is derived from station association in a foreign network.
Allow Roaming for
Authenticated Stations
Only
Yes
Enable this setting to require authentication for roaming stations.
Filter out DHCP
Release from Stations
No
Enable or disable the filtering of DHCP information when a client is
released from a station.
Re-home Idle Voice
Capable Client
No
Enable or disable re-homing for idle voice-capable clients. This setting
reassigns the home network in relation to a voice-capable client that is
idle (non-roaming).
Maximum Number of
Station Mobility Events
Per Second (1-65535)
10
Set the maximum number of events, per second, that station mobility
events can be supported.
Maximum Interval
Mobility Will Hold
Inactive Host Trail
(120-3600 sec)
600
Define how long inactive host trails are to be supported in IP mobility.
Home Agent
Proxy Mobile IP
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 145
Table 68 Advanced Services > IP Mobility, Add/Edit Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Maximum Entries in
User Mobility Trail
(1-30)
10
Define how many events are to be logged in IP mobility.
Mobility Host Entry
Hold Time After
Connectivity Loss
(30-3600 sec)
60
Define how long IP mobility is to support hosts should there be a
disconnection.
Mobility Host Entry
LIfetime When Mobility
Cannot Be Provided
(30-60000 sec)
120
Define how long host entries in the IP mobility domain are to be
maintained when they are without mobility.
Maximum Number of
BOOTP Packets Per
Transaction (0-65534)
25
Define the maximum number of BOOTP packets that can be supported
for a given transaction in proxy DHCP. All BOOTP packets are at least
300 bytes in size, by specification. BOOTP packets are used when a
host configures itself dynamically at boot time.
Maximum Time
Allowed for a DHCP
Transaction to
Complete (10-600 sec)
60
Set the maximum allowable time for proxy DHCP transactions to
complete.
Proxy DHCP Session
Hold Time after
Completion (dangerous)
(1-600 sec)
5
Specify the length of time a proxy DHCP session is to be supported after
DHCP processes are complete. Longer times are not considered
advisable.
Terminate Proxy DHCP
on Aggressive
Transaction ID Change
(dangerous)
No
If proxy DHCP is subject aggressive transaction ID change, this setting
terminates upon detection.
Performs Proxy-DHCP
for BOOTP Packets
Without DHCP-options
(dangerous)
No
Use this setting to support Proxy DHCP for BOOTP packets, but without
DHCP options.
Retransmit Interval
(100-10000 msec)
1000
Set the interval in milliseconds in which to retransmit in revocation.
A home agent or foreign agent can send a registration revocation
message, which revokes registration service for the mobile client. For
example, when a mobile client roams from one foreign agent to another,
the home agent can send a registration revocation message to the first
foreign agent so that the foreign agent can free any resources held for
the client.
Maximum Number of
Request Retransmits
(0-5)
3
Use this setting to define how many retransmits are supported before
revocation is enacted.
Proxy DHCP
Revocation
Click Add to create this IP Mobility Profile, or click Save to retain changes to an edited IP Mobility Profile.
146 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Advanced Services > IP Mobility > Mobility Domain
You configure mobility domains on master WLAN switches. All local WLAN switches managed by the
master WLAN switch share the list of mobility domains configured on the master. Mobility is disabled by
default and must be explicitly enabled on all WLAN switches that will support client mobility. Disabling
mobility does not delete any mobility-related configuration.
The home agent table (HAT) maps a user VLAN IP subnet to potential home agent addresses. The mobility
feature uses the HAT table to locate a potential home agent for each mobile client, and then uses this
information to perform home agent discovery. To configure a mobility domain, you must assign a home
agent address to at least one WLAN switch with direct access to the user VLAN IP subnet. (Some network
topologies may require multiple home agents.)
Alcatel-Lucent recommends you configure the switch IP address to match the AP’s local WLAN switch or
define the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) IP address to match the VRRP IP used for WLAN
switch redundancy. Do not configure both a switch IP address and a VRRP IP address as a home agent
address, or multiple home agent discoveries may be sent to the WLAN switch.
Configure the HAT with a list of every subnetwork, mask, VLAN ID, VRRP IP, and home agent IP address in
the mobility domain. Include an entry for every home agent and user VLAN to which an IP subnetwork
maps. If there is more than one WLAN switch in the mobility domain providing service for the same user
VLAN, you must configure an entry for the VLAN for each WLAN switch. Alcatel-Lucent recommends using
the same VRRP IP used by the AP.
The mobility domain named “default” is the default active domain for all WLAN switches. If you need only
one mobility domain, you can use this default domain. However, you also have the flexibility to create one
or more user-defined domains to meet the unique needs of your network topology. Once you assign a WLAN
switch to a user-defined domain, it automatically leaves the “default” mobility domain. If you want a WLAN
switch to belong to both the “default” and a user-defined mobility domain at the same time, you must
explicitly configure the “default” domain as an active domain for the WLAN switch.
Navigate to Advanced Services > IP Mobility > Mobility Domain from the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
navigation pane. This page displays all currently configured IP Mobility domains. Click Add to create a new IP
Mobility Domain, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to modify an existing domain. The
Advanced Services > IP Mobility > Add/Edit IP Mobility Domain page contains the following fields, as described
in Table 69:
Table 69 Advanced Services > IP Mobility > Add/Edit IP Mobility Domain Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
General Settings
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the domain is associated. The
drop-down menu displays all folders available for association with the domain.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the domain.
Other Settings
Active
No
Define whether the IP Mobility Domain is active or inactive.
Mobile IP Home Agents
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 147
Table 69 Advanced Services > IP Mobility > Add/Edit IP Mobility Domain Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Add
N/A
Use this button to create new home agents. Once you click Add, the following
additional fields appear in the Mobile IP Home Agent section. Complete these settings.
 Subnet—Define the subnet mask for the IP Mobility Domain.
 Netmask—Define the net mas for the IP Mobility Domain.
 Vlan ID (1-4094)—Set the VLAN to be supported on the IP Mobility Domain.
 Home Agent—Set the home agent for the IP Mobility Domain. When you enable
IP mobility in a mobility domain, the proxy mobile IP module determines the home
agent for a roaming client.
Click Add to create the home agent.
Click Add to create the new IP Mobility Domain, or click Save to save changes to a reconfigured IP Mobility
Domain. The domain is now available for use in IP Mobility profiles.
Advanced Services > VPN Services
For wireless networks, virtual private network (VPN) connections can be used to further secure the
wireless data from attackers. The Alcatel-Lucent WLAN switch can be used as a VPN concentrator that
terminates all VPN connections from both wired and wireless clients.
You can configure the WLAN switch for the following types of VPNs:

Remote access VPNs allow hosts, such as telecommuters or traveling employees, to connect to private
networks such as a corporate network over the Internet. Each host must run VPN client software that
encapsulates and encrypts traffic and sends it to a VPN gateway at the destination network. The WLAN
switch supports the following remote access VPN protocols:



Layer-2 Tunneling Protocol over IPSec (L2TP/IPSec)
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)
Site-to-site VPNs allow networks such as a branch office network to connect to other networks such as a
corporate network. Unlike a remote access VPN, hosts in a site-to-site VPN do not run VPN client
software. All traffic for the other network is sent and received through a VPN gateway that encapsulates
and encrypts the traffic.
Before enabling VPN authentication, you must configure the following:

The default user role for authenticated VPN clients—this is configured with roles and policies.

The authentication server group the WLAN switch will use to validate the clients—this is configured
with server groups.
You then specify the default user role and authentication server group in the VPN authentication profile.
The Advanced Services > VPN Services page displays all VPN service profiles that are currently configured,
and allows you to add VPN service profiles or to edit existing profiles.
Click the Add button to add a new VPN Service profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to
change its configuration. The VPN Services detail page appears, with settings defined in Table 70.
Table 70 Advanced Services > VPN Services > Add/Edit VPN Service Profiles Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the VPN service
profile is associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders
available for association with the VPN services profile.
General Settings
Folder
148 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 70 Advanced Services > VPN Services > Add/Edit VPN Service Profiles Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the VPN services profile.
IKE Profile
N/A
Select an IKE profile from the drop-down menu.
Click the add icon to add a new profile of this type, or click the pencil
icon to edit an existing IKE profile.
For additional information, refer to “Advanced Services > VPN
Services > IKE” on page 149.
PPTP Profile
N/A
Select a PPTK profile from the drop-down menu.
Click the add icon to add a new profile of this type, or click the pencil
icon to edit an existing PPTP profile.
For additional information, refer to “Advanced Services > VPN
Services > L2TP” on page 150.
L2TP Profile
N/A
Select an L2TP profile from the drop-down menu.
Click the add icon to add a new profile of this type, or click the pencil
icon to edit an existing L2TP profile.
For additional information, refer to “Advanced Services > VPN
Services > L2TP” on page 150.
IPSEC Profile
N/A
Select an IPSEC profile from the drop-down menu.
Click the add icon to add a new profile of this type, or click the pencil
icon to edit an existing IPSEC profile.
For additional information, refer to “Advanced Services > VPN
Services > IPSEC” on page 152.
Other Settings
Click Add to create the VPN Services profile, or click Save to change an existing profile. The new VPN
Service profile appears on the VPN Services page.
Advanced Services > VPN Services > IKE
Navigate to Advanced Services > VPN Services > IKE page from the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation
pane. This page displays all Internet Key Exchange (IKE) profiles currently available for VPN Services. IKE
is a part of the IPSEC protocol suite, supporting security for VPNs with a shared session secret that
produces security keys.
The IKE profile requires the WLAN switch to have a Remote Access Points license or a VPN Server license.
NOTE
Click Add to create a new IKE profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to edit that profile.
Table 71 describes the fields on the Advanced Services > VPN Services > IKE Add/Edit Detail page.
Table 71 Advanced Services > VPN Services > IKE Add/Edit Detail Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the IKE profile is
associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders available for
association with the IKE services profile.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the IKE profile.
General Settings
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 149
Table 71 Advanced Services > VPN Services > IKE Add/Edit Detail Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
IKE Aggressive Group
Name
N/A
Enter the authentication group name for aggressive mode. Make sure that
the group name matches the group name configured in the VPN client
software. Aggressive Mode condenses the IKE SA negotiations into three
packets (versus six packets for Main Mode). A group associates the same
set of attributes to multiple clients.
Enable IKE RAP PSKL
Refresh/Caching
No
Use this setting to enable refresh and caching for IKE on remote APs.
N/A
Click this button to add an IKE shared secret. The following settings
appear. Complete these settings and click Add in this section.
 Subnet—Enter the subnet for the shared secret.
 Subnet Mask—Enter the subnet mask for the shared secret.
 IKE Shared Secret—Type the shared secret, and confirm.
N/A
Click this button to add a new IKE policy. The following settings appear.
Complete these settings and click Add in this section.
 Priority—Type the priority number of this IKE policy.
 Encryption—From the drop-down menu, select the encryption type to
be supported in the IKE policy.
 Hash Algorithm—Select the hash algorithm for this IKE policy.
 Authentication—Select the authentication type to be supported in this
IKE policy.
 Diffie-Hellman Group—Select the bit-level to be supported.
 Lifetime (300-86400 sec)—Define the lifetime, in seconds, for the IKE
policy.
Once one or more policies are added, select the policy to apply to the VPN
Services > IKE profile being configured.
Other Settings
IKE Shared Secrets
Add
IKE Policies
Add
Click Add to create the VPN Services > IKE profile, or click Save to retain the changes to an existing IKE
profile. The profile appears on the Advanced Services > VPN Services > IKE page.
Advanced Services > VPN Services > L2TP
The combination of Layer-2 Tunneling Protocol and Internet Protocol Security (L2TP/IPSec) is a highly
secure technology that enables VPN connections across public networks such as the Internet. L2TP/IPSec
provides both a logical transport mechanism on which to transmit PPP frames as well as tunneling or
encapsulation so that the PPP frames can be sent across an IP network. L2TP/IPSec relies on the PPP
connection process to perform user authentication and protocol configuration. With L2TP/IPSec, the user
authentication process is encrypted using the Data Encryption Standard (DES) or Triple DES (3DES)
algorithm.
L2TP/IPSec requires two levels of authentication:

Computer-level authentication with a preshared key to create the IPSec security associations (SAs) to
protect the L2TP-encapsulated data.

User-level authentication through a PPP-based authentication protocol using passwords, SecureID,
digital certificates, or smart cards after successful creation of the SAs.
Navigate to Advanced Services > VPN Services > L2TP page from the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
navigation pane. This page lists all L2TP profiles that are currently available. Click Add to create a new
150 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
L2TP profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to modify settings. The Advanced Services >
VPN Services > L2TP Add/Edit Details page contains the following fields, as described in Table 72:
Table 72 Advanced Services > VPN Services > L2TP Add/Edit Details Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the L2TP
profile is associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders
available for association with the L2TP profile.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the L2TP profile.
Enable L2TP
Yes
Enable or disable this L2TP profile.
PPP Authentication
Modes
PAP
Select one or more authentication modes to support this L2TP
profile.
Primary DNS Server
N/A
Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Secondary DNS Server
N/A
Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Primary WINS Server
N/A
Enter the IP address of the primary Windows Internet Naming
Service (WINS) server.
Secondary WINS
Server
N/A
Enter the IP address of the secondary WINS server.
Hello Timeout
(10-1440 secs)
60
Enter the time, in seconds, at which L2TP authentication times
out.
SecurID Token
Persistence Timeout
(15-10080 Mins)
1440
Enter the time, in minutes, at which the SecurID Token expires.
requiring reauthentication.
General Settings
Other Settings
Click Add to complete the L2TP profile, or click Save to retain changes to an existing L2TP profile.
Advanced Services > VPN Services > PPTP
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is an alternative to L2TP/IPSec. Like L2TP/IPSec, PPTP provides
a logical transport mechanism to send PPP frames as well as tunneling or encapsulation so that the PPP
frames can be sent across an IP network. PPTP relies on the PPP connection process to perform user
authentication and protocol configuration.
With PPTP, data encryption begins after PPP authentication and connection process is completed. PPTP
connections use Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption (MPPE), which uses the Rivest-Shamir-Aldeman
(RSA) RC-4 encryption algorithm. PPTP connections require user-level authentication through a PPP-based
authentication protocol (MSCHAPv2 is the currently-supported method).
The PPTP page displays all PPTP profiles that are currently configured for use by VPN services. This page
lists the PPTP profile names, the VPN Services that reference these PPTP profiles, and the folder for each
PPTP profile. Click Add to create a new PPTP profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to
edit that profile. The Add/Edit Details page appears.
The Advanced Services > VPN Services > PPTP Add/Edit Details page contains the following fields, as
described in Table 73:
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 151
Table 73 Advanced Services > VPN Services > PPTP Add/Edit Details Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the PPTP
profile is associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders
available for association with the PPTP profile.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the PPTP profile.
Enable PPTP
Yes
Enable or disable this PPTP profile.
Echo Timeout
(10-300 sec)
60
Define the PPTP echo timeout, which is the time between request
and sending echo reply. Should this require more time than
specified in this field, the PPTP session times out.
PPP Authentication
MSCHAP
No
Enable or disable the MSCHAP authentication protocol for this
PPTP profile.
PPP Authentication
MSCHAPv2
Yes
Enable or disable the MSCHAPv2 authentication protocol for this
PPTP profile.
Primary DNS Server
N/A
Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Secondary DNS Server
N/A
Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Primary WINS Server
N/A
Enter the IP address of the primary Windows Internet Naming
Service (WINS) server.
Secondary WINS
Server
N/A
Enter the IP address of the secondary WINS server.
General Settings
Other Settings
Click Add to create the PPTP profile, or click Save to preserve changes to an existing PPTP profile. The
PPTP profile appears on the Advanced Services > VPN Services > PPTP page.
Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC
The combination of Layer-2 Tunneling Protocol and Internet Protocol Security (L2TP/IPSec) is a highly
secure technology that enables VPN connections across public networks such as the Internet. L2TP/IPSec
provides both a logical transport mechanism on which to transmit PPP frames as well as tunneling or
encapsulation so that the PPP frames can be sent across an IP network. L2TP/IPSec relies on the PPP
connection process to perform user authentication and protocol configuration. With L2TP/IPSec, the user
authentication process is encrypted using the Data Encryption Standard (DES) or Triple DES (3DES)
algorithm.
L2TP/IPSec requires two levels of authentication:

Computer-level authentication with a preshared key to create the IPSec security associations (SAs) to
protect the L2TP-encapsulated data.

User-level authentication through a PPP-based authentication protocol using passwords, SecureID,
digital certificates, or smart cards after successful creation of the SAs.
Navigate to Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC from the Alcatel-Lucent Configuration navigation
pane. This page displays the IPSEC profile name, the VPN services that use the IPSEC profile, and the folder
associated with the IPSEC Profile.
152 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Click Add to create a new IPSEC profile, or click the pencil icon next to an existing profile to modify
settings. The Add/Edit Details page contains the following fields, as described in Table 74:
Table 74 Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC Add/Edit Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the IPSEC
profile is associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders
available for association with the IPSEC profile.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the IPSEC profile.
1500
Define the Maximum transmission unit (MTU) size in bytes.
N/A
Select one or more dynamic maps that the IPSEC profile is to
reference. You can add or edit dynamic maps as required. For
additional information, refer to “Advanced Services > VPN
Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map” on page 153.
General Settings
Other Settings
Maximum MTU Size
(1034-1500 bytes)
Dynamic Maps
Dynamic Maps
Click Add to complete the creation of the IPSEC profile, or click Save to retain the changes to the IPSEC
profile. This profile appears on the Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC page.
Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map
VPN Services may reference IPSEC profiles. IPSEC profiles reference Dynamic Maps, and Dynamic Maps
reference Transform Sets. This interrelationship is conveyed in the navigation pane of Device Setup >
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration.
Dynamic maps establish policy templates that are used during negotiation requests in IPSEC. This occurs
during security associations from a remote IPSEC peer in the VPN, even when all cryptographic map
parameters are not known during new security associations from a remote IPSEC peer. For instance, if you
do not know about all the IPSec remote peers in your network, a Dynamic Map allows you to accept
requests for new security associations from previously unknown peers. Note that these requests are not
processed until the IKE authentication has completed successfully.
In short, a Dynamic Map is a policy template used by IPSEC profiles. Dynamic Maps are not used for
initiating IPSEC security associations, but for determining whether or not traffic should be protected in the
VPN.
To view Dynamic Maps that are currently configured, navigate to Advanced Services > VPN Services >
IPSEC > Dynamic Map. This page lists dynamic map names, IPSEC profiles that reference them, and the
folder.
Click Add to create a new Dynamic Map, or click the pencil icon next to an existing map to modify settings.
The Add/Edit Details page contains the fields as described in Table 75:
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 153
Table 75 Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map Add/Edit Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the Dynamic
Map is associated. The drop-down menu displays all folders
available for association with the Dynamic Map.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the Dynamic Map.
Priority
N/A
Specify the priority in which this Dynamic Map should be
processed in relation to additional Dynamic Maps that may be
configured and used by IPSEC profiles.
Perfect Forward
Secrecy Mode
None
From the drop-down menu, select the Diffie-Hellman group to be
used by this dynamic map.
Lifetime
(300-86400 sec)
N/A
Define the lifetime in seconds for the dynamic map, when
deployed in IPSEC profiles.
Transform Set 1-4
N/A
From the drop-down menu, select up to four transform sets in the
sequence in which they should be referenced by the Dynamic
Map. You can add a new Transform Set by clicking the add icon,
or you can edit an existing Transform Set by clicking the pencil
icon. For additional information, refer to “Advanced Services >
VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map > Transform Set” on
page 154.
General Settings
Other Settings
Click Add to complete the creation of the Dynamic Map, or click Save to retain changes to an existing
Dynamic Map.
Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map > Transform Set
VPN Services may reference IPSEC profiles. Transform sets define the encryption and hash algorithm to be
used by a dynamic map in an IPSEC profile that supports VPN Services.
Navigate to Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map > Transform Set from the AlcatelLucent Configuration navigation pane. This page displays all currently configured Transform Sets, and
which Dynamic Maps reference them.
Click Add to create a new Transform Set, or click the pencil icon next to an existing Transform Set to
modify settings. The Add/Edit Details page contains the following fields, as described in Table 76:
Table 76 Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map > Transform Set Add/Edit
Details Field Descriptions
Field
Default
Description
Folder
Top
Use this field to set and display the folder with which the
Transform Set is associated. The drop-down menu displays all
folders available for association with the Transform Set.
Name
Blank
Enter the name of the Transform Set.
General Settings
154 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Table 76 Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map > Transform Set Add/Edit
Details Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Default
Description
Encryption
168-bit 3DES-CBC
Select the encryption for the transform set from the drop-down
menu.
Hash Algorithm
SHA (HMAC Variant) Select the hash algorithm from the drop-down menu.
Other Settings
Click Add to create the new Transform Set, or click Save if editing an existing Transform Set. The
Transform Set is available for reference by Dynamic Maps in support of IPSEC profiles and VPN services.
Groups > Alcatel-Lucent Config Page and Section Information
Create Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups with the Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration page, as described in
earlier in this document. To view and edit profile assignments for Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups, perform these
steps.
1. Navigate to the Groups > List page.
2. Click the name of the Alcatel-Lucent AP Group to view and edit, and navigate to the Alcatel-Lucent
Config page, illustrated in Figure 40:
Figure 40 Groups > List > Alcatel-Lucent Config Page Illustration for an Alcatel-Lucent AP Group
3. Complete the profile assignments on this page, referring to additional topics in this appendix for
additional information. Table 77 provides a summary of sections on this page and topics supporting
these settings.
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference | 155
Table 77 Information Resources for the Groups > List > Alcatel-Lucent Config Page
Section
Additional Information Available In These Locations


Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Section



“AP Overrides Pages and Field Descriptions” on page 50
“AP Overrides Guidelines” on page 32
“Configuring or Editing AP Overrides” on page 32
“AP Overrides” on page 11

Appendix A, “Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference” on page 39

“Security > User Roles” on page 124
“Visibility in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 35

AP Overrides
Additional Alcatel-Lucent Profiles
Alcatel-Lucent User Roles
Alcatel-Lucent Policies
156 | Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Reference
“Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Pages and Field Descriptions” on page 41
“General Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups Procedures and Guidelines” on
page 26
“Setting Up Initial Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 18
“Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups” on page 11





“Security > Policies” on page 130
“Visibility in Alcatel-Lucent Configuration” on page 35
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Index
A
Adaptive Radio Management (ARM) .............................................................................................................34
Advanced Services
Advanced Services > IP Mobility page ....................................................................................................144
defined ....................................................................................................................................................14
pages and field descriptions ....................................................................................................................143
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups
defined ....................................................................................................................................................11
general procedures and guidelines .............................................................................................................26
pages and field descriptions ......................................................................................................................41
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration
Advanced Services ...................................................................................................................................14
Alcatel-Lucent AP Groups ........................................................................................................................11
commences in OV3600 6.3 .........................................................................................................................9
components of .........................................................................................................................................10
Folders, Users, and Visibility ....................................................................................................................14
initial setup ..............................................................................................................................................18
navigating ...............................................................................................................................................15
prerequisites ............................................................................................................................................18
primary OV3600 pages ............................................................................................................................15
Profiles ...................................................................................................................................................13
requirements ............................................................................................................................................10
restrictions ...............................................................................................................................................10
Security ...................................................................................................................................................13
WLANs ..................................................................................................................................................12
AP Overrides
guidelines ................................................................................................................................................32
pages and field descriptions ......................................................................................................................50
APs/Devices > List .......................................................................................................................................16
APs/Devices > Manage .................................................................................................................................16
APs/Devices > Monitor .................................................................................................................................17
D
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration .................................................................................................15
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services > IP Mobility ..........................................144
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services > IP Mobility > Mobility Domain ............147
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services > VPN Services ......................................148
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services > VPN Services > IKE ............................149
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC ........................152
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map 153
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services > VPN Services > IPSEC > Dynamic Map > Transform Set .....................................................................................................................................................154
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services > VPN Services > L2TP ..........................150
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Advanced Services > VPN Services > PPTP ..........................151
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Alcatel-Lucent Groups ...........................................................41
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > AP Overrides .........................................................................50
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA ......................................................................56
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Index | 157
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > 802.1x Auth ...............................................64
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > Captive Portal Auth ....................................58
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > Mac Auth ...................................................60
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > Management Auth ......................................63
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > Stateful 802.1X Auth ..................................61
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > VPN Auth ..................................................62
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AAA > Wired Auth Profile .....................................62
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP .........................................................................69
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > AP Ethernet Link ...........................................76
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > AP Wired ......................................................75
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > Regulatory Domain ........................................73
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > SNMP ...........................................................77
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > SNMP > SNMP User .....................................77
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > AP > System ..........................................................70
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS ........................................................................81
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service ..........................................85
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Denial of Service > Rate Threshold ................88
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > General ........................................................83
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Impersonation ...............................................90
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching .......................................84
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Signature Matching > Signatures ...................85
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > IDS > Unauthorized Device ....................................91
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > Mesh .....................................................................94
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > Mesh > Cluster .......................................................96
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > Mesh > Radio .........................................................94
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > QoS .......................................................................97
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > QoS > Traffic Management .....................................97
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > QoS > VoIP Call Admission Control .......................98
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF .......................................................................101
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio ...........................................101
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio > ARM ...............................103
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > 802.11a/g Radio > High-Throughput (HT) Radio 106
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > Event Thresholds .........................................107
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > RF > Optimization Profiles ...................................109
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > SSID ....................................................................111
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > SSID > EDCA AP ................................................115
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > SSID > EDCA Station ..........................................118
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Profiles > SSID > HT SSID ..................................................121
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Policies ...............................................................130
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Policies > Destinations .........................................130
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Policies > Services ...............................................131
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Server Groups .....................................................132
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Server Groups > Internal ......................................137
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Server Groups > LDAP ........................................134
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Server Groups > RADIUS ....................................135
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Server Groups > RFC 3576 ..................................139
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Server Groups > TACACS ...................................136
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Server Groups > XML API ...................................138
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > TACACS Accounting ..........................................139
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > Time Ranges .......................................................140
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > User Roles ...........................................................124
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > User Roles > BW Contracts ..................................126
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > User Roles > VPN Dialers ....................................127
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > Security > User Rules ...........................................................141
158 | Index
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs ................................................................................45
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs > Advanced ..............................................................47
Device Setup > Alcatel-Lucent Configuration > WLANs > Basic ....................................................................46
E
Encryption ...................................................................................................................................................34
F
Folders
defined ....................................................................................................................................................14
G
Groups > Basic .............................................................................................................................................17
I
IP Mobility Domains ...................................................................................................................................143
P
Profiles
defined ....................................................................................................................................................13
embedded configuration ...........................................................................................................................17
overview .................................................................................................................................................55
pages and field descriptions ......................................................................................................................55
S
Save, Save and Apply, and Revert buttons ......................................................................................................17
Security
defined ....................................................................................................................................................13
pages and field descriptions ....................................................................................................................123
SSIDs ....................................................................................11, 12, 14, 21, 32, 34, 44, 45, 46, 47, 111, 121
U
Users ...........................................................................................................................................................14
V
Visibility ......................................................................................................................................................14
W
WLANs
adding or editing ................................................................................................................................28, 30
defined ....................................................................................................................................................12
pages and field descriptions ......................................................................................................................45
Alcatel-Lucent Configuration Guide | OV3600 Version 6.3
Index | 159
">